2016 Townandcountry

2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Town & Country
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op-
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
portation. factured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 8

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
your satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through Vehicle Identification Number
the windshield. This number also appears stamped on
the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and
printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label
affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle regis-
tration and title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 ILLUMINATED APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate. . . . . . . . . .23 䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Lock . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .38
Door — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Door — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . .45
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .28 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . .51 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . .55 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .123
2
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .62 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .84
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition system.
This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the
Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature If Equipped
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go feature. Please refer to “Starting Procedures” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent 1 — OFF
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START 2 — ACCESSORY
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. 3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the Key Fob into the ignition switch located 2
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi-
tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking. Key Fob With Transmitter
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
Emergency Key Removal fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
into the lock cylinder with either side up. sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
Removing Key Fob From Ignition vehicle.
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob. (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
access to an unlocked vehicle. 2
Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- Key-In-Ignition Reminder
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
A child could operate power windows, other con- position.
trols, or move the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped)
cause serious injury or death.
will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Start- After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi-
ing Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
information. seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
SENTRY KEY electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
or unlocked. vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. as possible by an authorized dealer.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The CAUTION!
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
(Continued)
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
CAUTION! (Continued)
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
problems and loss of security protection. 2
is one that has never been programmed.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer sys-
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
Customer Key Programming
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it performed at an authorized dealer.
cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle. General Information
CAUTION! The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and flash repeatedly, and the horn will sound. For an addi-
tional 15-minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
2. This device must accept any interference received,
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration. Rearming Of The System
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
by the party responsible for compliance could void the additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
user’s authority to operate the equipment. Light flashing if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau- To Arm The System
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
provides both audible and visible signals. For the first position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps And Operating⬙ for further information).
and/or turn signals will flash, Vehicle Security Light will • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, To Disarm The System
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
key is physically removed from the ignition. the following methods: 2
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
vehicle: Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open. • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infor-
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
mation).
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
further information). position.
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
(RKE) transmitter. push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
NOTE: you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound. Tamper Alert
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Security System Manual Override
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED APPROACH The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the 2
the far left detent position).
doors or open any door.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
turned off by using the Electronic Vehicle Information
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
Center (EVIC) controls (if NOT equipped with a touch-
ther information.
screen radio) or the Uconnect radio (if equipped with a
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, touchscreen radio). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition tion Center (EVIC)” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position. standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the EQUIPPED
“Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on
the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position). This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button pushed from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE trans- Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
mitters, and those built with power options will be Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters. that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
Using The RKE Transmitter
(optional), power sliding doors, and Remote Start feature
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN-
LOCK, LOCK, and PANIC functions.
(optional). Some features can be programmed to the Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate
customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
sound horn on LOCK. transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to 2
unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the
Illuminated Entry system.
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform- ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
ing the following steps: Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
vehicle.
Security Alarm.
2. Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, push and hold the UNLOCK This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
button while still holding the LOCK button. are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
3. Release both buttons at the same time. proceed as follows:
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by push- • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
the Key Fob removed. derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to mation.
its previous setting.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
following steps: ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security 2
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
vehicle.
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
2. Push the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans- Alarm.
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10
Using The Panic Alarm
seconds. Then, push the PANIC button while still
holding the LOCK button. To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
3. Release both buttons at the same time. second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by push- headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
removed. you turn it off by pushing the PANIC button a second
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE: If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
• When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing the
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF) If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is
noises of the system. armed, using the RKE transmitter to open the power
liftgate does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle
• The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is Security Alarm.
running.
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped Equipped
Push the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter Push the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position. RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead position.
console.
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — If
armed, pushing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button Equipped
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve- This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when 2
hicle Security Alarm. the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
Equipped the current setting, proceed as follows:
Push the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/ tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open mation.
position.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is following steps:
armed, pushing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms the 1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Vehicle Security Alarm. vehicle.
2. Push and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed Programming Additional Transmitters
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
than 10 seconds. Then, push and hold the LOCK contact your authorized dealer for details.
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by Push- battery.
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and NOTE:
the Key Fob removed. • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
its previous setting. • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- housing or the printed circuit board.
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security hand.
Alarm.
Emergency Key Removal Inserting Key Into Transmitter Case Slot

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Separating Transmitter Case
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the eration.
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. by the party responsible for compliance could void the
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch user’s authority to operate the equipment.
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Hood closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Liftgate closed
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- 2
• Hazard switch off
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
NOTE:
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range. • Vehicle theft alarm not active
How To Use Remote Start • Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
WARNING!
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled. The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to the ON/RUN position.
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start To Enter Remote Start Mode
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death. Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
turely: cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

NOTE: UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. After the
vehicle is unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, push and
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
release the START/STOP button (or insert the Key Fob
will automatically lock the doors. 2
into the ignition switch and move it to the ON/RUN
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during position). Otherwise, the engine will shut off at the end of
Remote Start mode. 15-minute cycle.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
in the Remote Start mode. the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
• The engine can be started two times (15 minutes the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the igni- equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
tion switch must be cycled by pushing the START/ push and release the START/STOP button. If the START/
STOP button twice (or the ignition switch must be STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the
cycled to the ON/RUN position). ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN
position.
To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
NOTE: • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
the START/STOP button.
Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Remote Start Cancel Remote Start
Active - Key To Run⬙ will display in the EVIC until you Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
insert and turn the key to the ON/RUN position. occur:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter- • The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle. • Any engine warning lights come on.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter- • Fuel lamp turns on.
N-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active — • The hood is opened.
Key To Run” will display in the EVIC until you insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN position. Refer to • The hazard switch is pushed.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for • The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
further information.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute button was pushed, the vehicle must be reset by cycling
cycle. the START/STOP button to the ON/RUN position.
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start General Information 2
Mode The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds
after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
When To Reset Remote Start
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of eration.
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start- by the party responsible for compliance could void the
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs
on each door trim panel.
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock

If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING! (Continued)
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake 2
ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
Sliding Door Lock be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
WARNING! seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
• For personal security and safety in the event of a warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as or the gear selector.
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
Power Door Locks — If Equipped

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing
the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the If you push the power door lock switch while the sliding
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to door is open, the sliding door will lock.
remove the Key Fob. 2
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
Front Passenger Power Door Switches the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not NOTE:
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
door locks (lock or unlock).
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Ve- Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings further information.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
• If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for an
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
extended period of time, the Passive Entry feature for
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors Automatically at the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
15 mph (24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
Exit features in accordance with local laws. Entry feature.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a sponse time.
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm. 2
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the vehicles door’s automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s Transmitter In Vehicle
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
present in the ignition.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked. transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times.
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
NOTE:On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the
vehicle. 2
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: All doors will remain locked when the liftgate
release handle is pushed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door NOTE:
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 2
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
WINDOWS
Power Windows
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
You can control either the front or rear windows using
The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
windows from the driver’s seat. the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
Driver’s Power Window Switches

NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature. Power Window Lockout Switch
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window 2
and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
Front Passenger Power Door Switches

1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
The front window switches may be equipped with an Equipped
Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the The front driver and front passenger switches may be
detent, release, and the window will go down automati- equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
cally. switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to To stop the window from going all the way up during the
stop. Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
The power window switches remain active for up to 10 To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after the first detent and release when you want the window to
the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening a stop.
vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back steps after vehicle power is restored: 2
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch again to close the window. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger additional two seconds after the window is closed.
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the detent to open the window completely and continue
first detent and hold to close window manually. to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window Equipped
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
the window path before closing. door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power stopping several inches above the window sill.
accessory delay.
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
activated the Power Window Lockout. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are
open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR

The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back- Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the anytime the vehicle is in motion.
hold open latch in order to close the door. 2
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol- while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
lowing guidelines: when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
• Always open the door smoothly. fuel door.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open- Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle The power sliding door may be opened or
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in closed manually or by using the buttons on the
the downhill direction. RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your power sliding door handle will also power open or close
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding the power sliding door.
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually.
Push the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pushing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console
for the driver and passengers. Pushing the switch once Power Sliding Door Switch
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pushed If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
while the door is under a power cycle, the door will power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
reverse direction. door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked mode.
before the power sliding door switches will operate. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to door switch is pushed. To close the door, wait until it
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat is fully open and then push the switch again.
passengers.
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc- 2
NOTE: tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
clicking sound until the door has no further move-
power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the
ment. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the
the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs,
power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and
no damage is done to the power sliding door motor.
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be
The power sliding door must be opened or closed
pushed.
manually.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically WARNING!
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance. You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or before closing the door.
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
(Continued)
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12
seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will Power Sliding Side Door Power Switch
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
entering or exiting the vehicle.
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or and handles may be overridden by pushing the OFF side
disabled by performing the following procedure: of the Power Switch located in the front overhead con-
sole.
1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
When the power sliding door power switch is in the OFF
2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five
position, the power sliding side door may not be opened
times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start
or closed by pushing the switch located on the B-pillar
the engine).
trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or activating
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, push the HAZ- the inside power sliding door handle.
ARD switch ON.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a 2
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Power Switch
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Power Switch
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward NOTE:
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always
Door Lock.
test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the
desired position.
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en-
gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front
of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child
Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unin-
Child Protection Door Lock
tentional operation of the power sliding door from
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. the rear seats, push the “OFF” Master Lock Out
Switch located in the front overhead console, next to
the driver.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. always test the door from the inside to make certain it 2
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened is in the desired position.
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the B-Pillar trim panel just in front of the power • The power sliding side door switches will not open the
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
are engaged. vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock • The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
1. Open the sliding side door. overhead console, or the switches located on the
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Pro- door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the
tection Door Lock. child lock lever position.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if

equipped).
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate release handle
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle Location

Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. Push the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pushing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate. 2
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pushing the button located on the overhead console.
Overhead Console Master Power Switch

1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Power Switch
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button, and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. liftgate is opening or closing.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate. WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
When the RKE transmitter button is pushed and the strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash position.
• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open (62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
times indicating power operation is in progress. liftgate buttons. 2
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the within the same cycle, the system will automatically
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must stop and must be opened or closed manually.
be opened or closed manually.
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
full open position. accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph • If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
(0 km/h). time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
reset power liftgate functionality.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −12°F (−24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING!
Some of the most important safety features in your
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous vehicle are the restraint systems:
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep • Seat Belt Systems
the liftgate closed when you are operating the • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, • Supplemental Active Head Restraints
make sure that all windows are closed, and the • Child Restraints
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode. Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
possible.
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
risk of harm from a deploying air bag: child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly. 2
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
move the seat as far back as possible and use the back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) Air Bags room to inflate.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil- between occupants and the door and occupants could
dren who do not use child restraints or belt- be injured.
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
them or under their arm. under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
WARNING!
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of be belted at all times.
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
facing child restraint. and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
with a rear seat. their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
Seat Belt Systems position.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Initial Indication
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
happen far away from home or on your own street. turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and Change Of Status
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active 2
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
BeltAlert Warning Sequence the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un- when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning and cargo is properly stowed.
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
vating BeltAlert.
pants to buckle their seat belts.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
WARNING!
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
are buckled. some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Lap/Shoulder Belts Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
lap/shoulder belts. much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul- other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt vehicle are buckled up properly.
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at 2
belts. the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
using a seat belt properly. belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
injuries in a collision much worse. You might a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
safe, too. it fixed.
• Two people should never be belted into a single • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
another in a collision, hurting one another badly. ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
than one person, no matter what their size. buckle nearest you.
(Continued) (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
your seat belt snugly. frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck replaced after a collision.
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. adjust the seat.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
are meant to be used together. pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
(Continued) around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning The Lap Belt

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch 2
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder Adjustable Anchorage
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
up or down to the position that serves you best. shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows from its stowed position in the headliner slightly
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward behind the third row seat.
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Third Row Center Belt Operating Instructions
The third row center seat belt features a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to
detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the headliner for added conve-
nience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind
the front seats when the seat is not occupied. Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head
the seat. restraint.
2
Mini-Latch Stowage Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
“click.” around your lap.
Connect Mini-Latch To Buckle Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision. 2
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into
the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt
will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove position.
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
WARNING!
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
properly connected when the seat belt is used by an pant, it must be removed.
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury WARNING!
in a collision.
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
required in order to properly fit the original seat
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
Seat Belt Extender increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper recommended seating positions. Remove and store
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. 2
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an worn snugly and positioned properly.
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be Second Row Captains Chair
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
2
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
Second Row Bench properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING!
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child locking mode.
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
WARNING!
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat. • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode ture or any other seat belt function is not working
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
the entire seat belt is extracted. increase the risk of injury in collisions.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
child restraints that have a harness for restraining 2
the child. When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
certain types of rear impacts.
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic. However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
ity and type of the impact.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components death.
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim) • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
2 — Seatback struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
(Continued)
US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. Personally attempt-
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re- ing to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this 2
that could impair their function.
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and

positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a
collision, the front half of the head restraint will be
extended forward and separated from the rear half of the
head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
AHR In Reset Position
after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must
be reset into the original position to best protect the
occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
WARNING!
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an • Front and Side Impact Sensors
authorized dealer immediately. • Seat Belt Pretensioners
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) • Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag System Components • Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag Advanced Front Air Bags
system components:
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
• Air Bag Warning Light belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Steering Wheel and Column passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
• Instrument Panel instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Knee Impact Bolsters the air bag covers.
• Advanced Front Air Bags
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument 2
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
Locations with a rear seat.
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
WARNING!
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as on the instrument panel or steering wheel, because
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is
which may receive information from the front impact in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to
sensors or other system components. inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy the air bags and you could be injured because the air
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy bags may no longer be functional. The protective
output is used for more severe collisions. covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front only when the air bags are inflating.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
Advanced Front Air Bags. collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad- away from an inflating air bag. 2
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad- vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
collisions, including some that may produce substantial Advanced Front Air Bags.
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
severe initial deceleration. helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Air Bags. provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bags.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact Supplemental Side Air Bags
bolsters in any way. Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
radios, etc. Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they 2
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label pushed into you, causing serious injury.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
“AIRBAG.”
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
WARNING!
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high Side Air Bags should have deployed. 2
enough to block the deployment of the SABICs.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
The trim covering above the side windows where
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
the SABIC and its deployment path are located
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
should remain free from any obstructions.
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
infant or child restraint.
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
the roof of the vehicle for any reason. necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de- upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat Side Impacts
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
WARNING! The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
against the door or window. Sit upright in the Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
center of the seat. Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy- deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
ment could cause you to be severely injured or impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
killed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even Front Air Bags deploy.
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events If A Deployment Occurs
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of immediately after deployment. 2
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro- NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not the air bag system.
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. or all of the following may occur:
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten- tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags, normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a significantly within a few days, or if you have any
near rollover event. blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
WARNING!
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on System serviced as well.
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning. NOTE:
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air but they will open during air bag deployment.
bags will not be in place to protect you. • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
tem perform the following functions: compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
2
and starting the engine.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control-
button. ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as system electrical components.
the battery has power.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
• Unlock the power door locks. the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
Procedure the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or dealer service the air bag system immediately.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds first turned to the ON/RUN position.
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
eight-second interval.
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A remains on while driving.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
again after initial startup.
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc- the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. system immediately.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the 2
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
service the air bag system immediately. bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
WARNING! not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system air bag system service. If your seat, including your
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
be injured if the air bag system is not there to way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
protect you. Do not modify the components or seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
modify the air bag system for persons with dis- accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
abilities, contact your authorized dealer. • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Event Data Recorder (EDR) These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
is designed to record such data as: crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
WARNING!
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a 2
vehicle or the EDR. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
Child Restraints hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all how strong you are. The child and others could be
times, including babies and children. badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
province, requires that small children ride in proper
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
children from newborn size to the child almost large
ecuted for ignoring it.
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
the rear seats rather than in the front. Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-732-8243.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
younger and who have not reached Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
the height or weight limits of their seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
old or who have out-grown the five-point Harness, facing forward in the
height or weight limit of their rear seat of the vehicle
rear-facing child restraint
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
forward-facing child restraint, but seat belt, seated in the rear seat of 2
are too small to properly fit the the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children Too Large for Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
Child Restraints who have out-grown the height or the vehicle
weight limit of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
It is recommended for children from birth until they child seat.
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
WARNING! WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear- was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
facing child restraint. child may be more severely injured as a result.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- • Improper installation can lead to failure of an 2
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- collision. The child could be badly injured or
tion are for children who are over two years old or who killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of directions exactly when installing an infant or
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should child restraint.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
allowed by the child seat. because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
All children whose weight or height is above the
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt. (Continued)
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
serious personal injury.
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
Children Too Large For Booster Seats child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
over the front of the seat when their back is against the A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
vehicle’s seat belt alone: booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
way back?
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
between their neck and arm?
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
2
Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint Only + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren seating position. These anchorages are used to install
(LATCH) Restraint System LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Second Row Bench

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Second Row Captains Chairs
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
child restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached using No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint 2
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The 2nd row head restraints on bench and
fixed quad seats are removable. 2nd row
stow ’n go head restraints are not remov-
able. The 3rd row center head restraint is
removable in all vehicles.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)

third row center seating position. The tether anchorages
are located on the back of the seat, near the floor.
2
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages

Shown)
Locating Tether Anchorages Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
There are tether strap anchorages located be-
hind the second row seating positions and the LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
WARNING!
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. typical installation instructions.
Center Seat LATCH Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, restraint systems will be installed as described here.
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
position. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- 2
anchorages. tions to attach a tether anchor.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
that seating position. For some second row seats, you rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved turer’s instructions.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
to allow more room for the child seat.
in any direction.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
WARNING!
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being • Improper installation of a child restraint to the
used by other occupants or being used to secure child LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of • Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
Belt retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back 2
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of ditional information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the child restraint’s belt path.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Second Row Bench

• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
Second Row Captains Chair • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems
Frequently Asked Question About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using the 2
+ weight of the child restraint) for using Child Restraint seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to straint, up to the recommended weight limit
attach a forward facing child restraint? of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and
the back of the front passenger seat? the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The 2nd row head restraints on bench and
fixed quad seats are removable. 2nd row
stow ’n go head restraints are not removable.
The 3rd row center head restraint is remov-
able in all vehicles.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latch plates
tighten the seat belt against the belt path (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up
of the child restraint? to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk
in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
You may also move the front seat forward to allow bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor lap portion around the child restraint while you push
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. vehicle seat.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.” seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to You may also move the front seat forward to allow
attach a tether anchor. more room for the child seat.
2
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction. path.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. “click.”
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to vehicle seat.
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
attach a tether anchor. the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
in any direction. Anchorage:
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. WARNING!
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have to any location in front of the car seat, including the
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon- seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint. (Continued)
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap- your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 2
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Anchorage Shown) Shown)
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING!
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. 2
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
tether strap. 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
opening between the seatbacks as you remove Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
slack in the strap. mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
a collision. the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
in the engine or damage may result. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
not interpreted as a problem. injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
SAFETY TIPS
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
Transporting Passengers belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
using a seat belt properly.
AREA.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling 2
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. blower at high speed.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
follow these safety tips: the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in system.
confined areas any longer than needed to move Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
your vehicle in or out of the area. system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
mode. seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
(Continued) inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
Vehicle soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Seat Belts
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
system. Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after Defroster
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Air Bag Warning Light authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to able.
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch Floor Mat Safety Information
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals. 2
WARNING! • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of been removed for cleaning.
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
sonal injury. driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
attached to the floor mat fasteners. and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor control.
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly • If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer- stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
vehicle. mounting can cause interference with the brake
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Door Latches
The Vehicle Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Tires Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
should be located and corrected immediately.
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .136
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .140
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .136
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .141
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .139
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .151 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Uconnect Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . .194
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .169 ▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .195
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Stow ’n Go Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .200
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .181
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .212
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped. . . . .213
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat — If
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 ▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks. . . . . . . . .219 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .219 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .227
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .220 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .228
3
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless ▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Seat Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .232
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .226
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .234
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .226
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .236
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .238
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 ▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .240 ▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . .252
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF ▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .253
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF ▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Front Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 3
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .270
▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . . . . .258
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .272
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . .260
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .272
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .261
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .263
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .267
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . . .285
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF ▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Second Row Floor Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .278
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Center And Rear Overhead Console
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Premium Console Cupholders — If ▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .283
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .292
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .299
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF 䡵 SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .305
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 3
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The
On/Off symbol on the button will illuminate when the
auto-dimming feature is enabled.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
CAUTION!
moving in reverse.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the 3
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
Automatic Dimming Mirror mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
(Continued)
• Full rearward position
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging • Normal position
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex Power Mirrors — If Equipped
mirror.
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If door trim panel.
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto-
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
mirror that you want to adjust. rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
3
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to Seat Only) — If Equipped
move. Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understand- will move slightly downward from the present position
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position. Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
following occurs: To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. 3
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Illuminated Mirror
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
3
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
BSM Warning Light and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an Side Monitoring
alert during these types of zone entries. Entering From The Rear
Entering From The Side Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
side of the vehicle.
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
Overtaking/Approaching
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s 3
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
Opposing Traffic vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
WARNING!
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(Continued)
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
RCP Detection Zones parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
situations. death.
Modes Of Operation Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
Modes Of Operation With EVIC When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to 3
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side be reduced.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when NOTE:
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
system, the radio volume is reduced.
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio volume is reduced. • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with General Information
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
the RCP state always requests the chime. Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Blind Spot Alert Off Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems. 2. The device must accept any interference received,
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
eration of the device.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
used. other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
UCONNECT PHONE — IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone for private conversation.
using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth 3
“Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio sys- Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
tem; the system will automatically mute your radio when different electronic devices to connect to each other
using the Uconnect Phone. without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
equipped with the Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile,” Ver- it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect website for sup- is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
ported phones. Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven
mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one
For Uconnect Customer Support: linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877- system at a time. The system is available in English,
855-8400. Spanish, or French languages.
• Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Voice Command Button
WARNING!
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
Any voice commanded system should be used only dio. The individual buttons are described in the
in safe driving conditions following all applicable “Operation” section.
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the
causing serious injury or death. Uconnect website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
Uconnect Phone Button details.
The radio or steering wheel controls (if The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
equipped) will contain the two control buttons audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
(Uconnect Phone button and Voice Com- adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or
mand button) that will enable you to from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
access the system. When you push the button you will equipped.
hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command. The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice com-
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
mand “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone
compound form command into two voice commands:
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the 3
Uconnect Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal
specific command and then guided through the available
conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a
options.
few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
Voice Command Tree
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt. Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Help Command
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
“Pair a Device,” the following compound command know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth Device.” the beep. The Uconnect Phone will play some of the
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
To activate the Uconnect Phone, simply push the Phone The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for direc- pairing instructions:
tions. Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of
1. Enable Bluetooth on your mobile phone.
the Phone button on the radio control head.
2. Push the Phone button to begin.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and 3. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a “Device Pairing.”
few instances the system will take you back to the 4. When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
previous menu. and follow the audible prompts.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Iden-
tification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference PIN after the initial pairing process.
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect web-
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a Dial By Saying A Number
priority level between one and seven, with one being To dial a number using Voice Command:
the highest priority.
You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect
3
Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
can be in use, connected to your Uconnect System. The “Dial.”
priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile • The system will prompt you to say the number you
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at want to call. For example, you can say “234 567 8901.”
the same time. For example, if priority three and priority
five phones are present in the vehicle, the Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and
will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a then dial. The number will appear in the display of
call. You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at certain radios.
any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this Call By Saying A Name
section for further information).
To call a specific name using Voice Command:
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.”
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the • To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or
person you want to call. downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
by Saying a Name” section.
• For example, you can say “John Doe,” where John
Doe is a previously stored name entry in the • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook. as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to
start the vehicle.
“Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook.”
• A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will be down-
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
Transfer From Mobile Phone
to the Uconnect Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
website for supported phones. able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile • Use of long names helps the Voice Command and is
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded. recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or
“Robert” instead of “Bob.”
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be 4. When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
3
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- “Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”).
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next • This will allow you to store multiple numbers for
phone connection. each phonebook entry, if desired.
Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook 5. When prompted, recite the phone number for the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is phonebook entry that you are adding.
only recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
To add names to the Uconnect Phonebook using Voice book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
Command: phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
“Phonebook New Entry.” four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
3. When prompted, say the name of the new entry. language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and 3. Select the number designation (home, work, mobile,
supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically or other) that you wish to edit.
downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
4. When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries phonebook entry that you are editing.
NOTE: After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
• Editing names in the phonebook is only recommended
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
when the vehicle is not in motion.
to the main menu.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
deleted or edited.
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
To edit a Uconnect Phonebook entry using Voice Com- phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mand: mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
“Phonebook Edit Entry.”
• You will then be asked for the name of the phone-
book entry that you wish to edit.
Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
NOTE:
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
• Editing phonebook entries is only recommended when from which you choose. To select one of the entries
the vehicle is not in motion. from the list, push the Voice Command button 3
while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired
• ONLY the phonebook entry in the current language is
entry and say “Delete.”
deleted.
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect Phone will ask
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
you which designation you wish to delete: home,
deleted or edited.
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
To delete a Uconnect Phonebook Entry using Voice wish to delete.
Command:
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
“Phonebook Delete.” • ONLY the phonebook in the current language is de-
leted.
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
To delete or erase all Uconnect phonebook entries using • The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the
Voice Command: phonebook entries, including the downloaded
phonebook entries, if available.
3. To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice
Command button during the playing of the
“Phonebook Erase All.”
desired name, and say “Call.”
• The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you
• The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” opera-
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
tions at this point.
3. After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
4. The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the
deleted.
number designation you wish to call.
List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook
5. The selected number will be dialed.
To list ALL names in the Uconnect Phonebook using
voice Command: Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
“Phonebook List Names.” plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
mobile service provider for the features that you have. market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Currently In Progress
3
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, Progress
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
Push the Phone button to accept the call. To reject push the Voice Command button and say “Dial” or
the call, push and hold the Phone button until you “Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
hear a single beep, indicating that the incoming call entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
was rejected. while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference
Currently In Progress
Call” in this section.
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the Phone button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold Conference Call
To put a call on hold: When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold):
1. Push the Phone button until you hear a single
beep. 1. Push and hold the Phone button until you hear a
• This indicates that the call is on hold. double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
• To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone button until you hear a single beep. Three-Way Calling
Toggling Between Calls To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
button while a call is in progress, and make a
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), second phone call, as described under “Making a
push the Phone button until you hear a single beep, Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.” After
indicating that the active and hold status of the two the second call has established, push and hold the
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on Phone button until you hear a double beep, indi-
hold at a time. cating that the two calls have been joined into one
conference call.
Call Termination NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect Phone.
To end a call in progress:
Call Continuation
1. Momentarily push the Phone button.
• Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the 3
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
call on hold may not become active automatically. able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
This is cell phone-dependent. • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call
Phone button until you hear a single beep. ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and
Redial transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• Push the Phone button to begin. • After the ignition key is cycled to OFF, a call can
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration,
“Redial.” after which the call is automatically transferred from
the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone.
• The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mo- NOTE: After every Uconnect Phone language change
bile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF. operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
Uconnect Phone Features
specific and is usable across all languages.
Language Selection
Emergency Assistance
To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using:
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
• Push the Phone button to begin. reachable:
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
the name of the language you wish to switch to number for your area.
English, Espanol, or Francais.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the operational, you may reach the emergency number as
language selection. follows:
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and • Push the Phone button to begin.
voice commands will be in that language.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the
paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
WARNING!
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico. To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency,
NOTE: your mobile phone must be:
• Turned on. 3
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country • Paired to the Uconnect System.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • Have network coverage.
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
area. If you need roadside assistance:
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • Push the Phone button to begin.
some systems. To do this, push the Phone button
and say “Setup,” followed by “Emergency.” • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance.”
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assis- Working With Automated Systems
tance phone number using the Voice Command system. This method is used in instances where one generally has
To do this, push the Phone button and say “Setup,”
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
followed by “Towing Assistance.” When prompted
navigating through an automated telephone system.
say 1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
City in Mexico. system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
Paging
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
work properly with the Uconnect Phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice
Voice Mail Calling Command button and say the sequence you wish to
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working enter, followed by the word “Send.” For example, if
with Automated Systems.” required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3
7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command button
and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.” Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by “Send,” is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
service center menu structure, and to leave a number out settings that are too short and may not allow the
on a pager. use of this feature.
You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as Barge In — Overriding Prompts
3
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
call and then push the Voice Command button and
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
say “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
could push the Voice Command button and say,
entry you wish to send. The Uconnect Phone will then “Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to
send the corresponding phone number associated listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
NOTE:
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect Phone
network configurations. This is normal. will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Push the Phone button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile
one of the following: phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On” audio system. The Uconnect Phone will work the same as
if you dial the number using Voice Command.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
Phone And Network Status Indicators dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will provide that the call did not go through even though the call is in
notification to inform you of your phone and network progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
status when you are attempting to make a phone call audio.
using Uconnect Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing mute the Uconnect Phone:
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Push the Voice Command button.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Following the beep, say “Mute.” Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
To un-mute the Uconnect Phone:
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
• Push the Voice Command button. electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
3
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.” with one electronic device at a time.
Advanced Phone Connectivity If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between your mobile phone and the
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Uconnect Phone System, follow the instructions de-
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the To list the paired mobile phone names using Voice
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, push the Voice Command Command:
button and say “Transfer Call.”
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
3. When prompted, say “List Phones.”
The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all The selected phone will be used for the next phone call.
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect Phone
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in
being announced, push the Voice Command button or near (approximately within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.
and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two
Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones
sections for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone. To delete Uconnect phone paired mobile phones using
Voice Command:
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
mobile phone paired with the Uconnect Phone. 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
To select another mobile phone using Voice Command:
3. At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also push the Phone button at any time
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. while the list is being played, and then choose the
• You can also push the Phone button at any time phone you wish to delete.
while the list is being played, and choose the
phone that you wish to select.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect • Push the Voice Command button and say the
Phone “Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice
Training” command.
Uconnect Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore 3
Phone button and say “Uconnect Tutorial.” the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by the Uconnect Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training Voice Training session should be completed when the
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect closed, and the blower fan switched off.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
dures:
Reset
From outside the Uconnect Phone mode (e.g., from radio
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
mode):
• Push and hold the Voice Command button for five 1. Push the Phone button.
seconds until the session begins, or, 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
• This will delete all phone pairing, phone book en- Performance is maximized under:
tries, and other settings in all language modes. The
• Low-to-medium blower setting
System will prompt you before resetting to factory
settings. • Low-to-medium vehicle speed
Voice Command • Low road noise
For best performance: • Smooth road surface
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch • Fully closed windows
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
• Dry weather condition
and the mirror.
NOTE:
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • When navigating through an automated system such
during a Voice Command period. as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended. Audio quality is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names • Low-to-medium blower setting
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed 3
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries • Low road noise
are not similar. • Smooth road surface
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • Fully closed windows
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• Dry weather conditions, and
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • Operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number NOTE:
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect Phone.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
compromised with the convertible top down. “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Recent Calls • Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for
you.
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load,” Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
and Missed Calls. the message using Uconnect Phone.
SMS Send Messages:

Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
phone. new message:
Read Messages: 1. Push the Phone button.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be “SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
made to notify you that you have a new text message. If 3. You can either say the message you wish to send or
you wish to hear the new message: say “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
1. Push the Phone button. To send a message, push the Voice Command button
while the system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
number of the person you wish to send the message to. Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
List of Preset Messages: the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
1. Yes 12. I am on my way 1. Push the Phone button.
3
2. No 13. I’ll be late 2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
3. Where are you? 14. Are you there yet? will then be given a choice to change it.
4. I need more direction 15. Where are we meeting? Bluetooth Communication Link
5. L O L 16. Can this wait? Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
6. Why 17. Bye for now Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be re-established by switching the phone off/
7. I love you 18. When can we meet? on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
8. Call me 19. Send number to call Bluetooth ON mode.
9. Call me later 20. Start without me Power-Up
10. Thanks After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
11. See You in 15 minutes must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s)
Primary Alternate (s) all
zero call
one cancel 3
two confirmation prompts
three continue
four delete
five dial
six download
seven edit
eight emergency
nine English
star (*) erase all
plus (+) Espanol
pound (#) Francais
add location help
Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s)

home redial
language return to main menu return or main menu
list names select phone select
list phones send
mobile set up phone settings or phone
mute set up
mute off towing assistance
new entry transfer call
no Uconnect Tutorial
other voice training
pair a phone work
phone pairing pairing yes
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
General Information USB mass storage class device, iPod family of devices,
Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, satellite radio, and a
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
memo recorder.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the 3
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
the party responsible for compliance could void the
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
voice level.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, WARNING!
including interference that may cause undesired op- Any voice commanded system should be used only
eration. in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
tention should be focused on safely operating the
Voice Command System Operation vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows causing serious injury or death.
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
When you push the Voice Command button, you will These commands are universal and can be used from any
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a com- menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
mand. the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options. The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning blower
options, push the Voice Command button, listen for is set to low.
the beep, and say your command. At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
Pushing the Voice Command button while the sys- commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
tem is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Com-
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or mand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
Commands Main Menu
The Voice Command system understands two types of Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command but-
commands, Universal commands and Local commands. ton. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
Universal commands are available at all times. Local menu.
commands are available if the supported radio mode is 3
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
active.
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
Changing The Volume
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button. • “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth Stream-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
ing mode)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system. • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Next Station” (to select the next station) Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands: • “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) • “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc Mode Bluetooth Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands: “Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track) 3
• “Play” (to play the current track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you Memo Mode
may say the following commands: To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may push the Voice Command but-
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
Name, Track Name, etc.) the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo) Setup
– “Continue” (to continue recording) To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may push the Voice Com- • “Switch to system setup”
mand button to stop playing memos. You pro- • “Main menu setup”
ceed by saying one of the following commands: • “Switch to setup”
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language English”
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Language French”
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Language Spanish”
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-
Command button first and wait for the beep before peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
speaking the “Barge In” commands. last trained voice only.
Voice Training SEATS 3

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Push the Voice Command button, say “System
WARNING!
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
the system and will improve recognition. these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by or killed.
Uconnect Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
session should be completed when the vehicle is vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switch

1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback Switch
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not place any article under a power seat or
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
control which could cause a collision and serious the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if 3
injury or death. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat path.
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
seat belt. The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat when the desired position has been reached.
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
WARNING!
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
switch when the desired position has been reached. control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat seat belt.
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
the switch when the desired position has been reached. shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
Reclining The Seatback belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if 3
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
Power Lumbar Switch
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease Heated Seats — If Equipped
the lumbar support. On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING!
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin driver’s heated seat can be programmed through the
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) to come on
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- during a remote start. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns ment Panel” for further information.
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time. Front Heated Seats
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
in a seat that has been overheated could cause below the climate controls.
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber Rear Heated Seats
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
LO and none for OFF. second row passengers to operate the seats indepen-
3
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
Push the switch a second time to select LO- side door handle trim panels.
level heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch

You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
LO and none for OFF.
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-
level heating. Push the switch a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the dis-
play will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. Manual Seat Adjuster
The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
approximately 45 minutes. the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the
sure that the seat adjusters have latched. recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
WARNING! 3
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline Lever

To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
WARNING!
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the death in the event of a collision.
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
which could result in serious injury or death. Seats
Head Restraints Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear tion of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top (AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. 3
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac- 3
WARNING! tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
• All occupants, including the driver, should not straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the warning could cause personal injury if the Active
head restraints are placed in their proper positions Head Restraint is deployed.
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head If your vehicle is equipped with a second row bench seat,
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust- the head restraints are not adjustable.
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
Head Restraints — Third Row
push downward on the head restraint.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
Stow ’n Go Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Adjustment Button
Second Row Stow ’n Go
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seats, the seats
will fold and tumble in one motion.
1. Move the front seat fully forward. 3
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the
armrests are raised.
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
“LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
latch to open the cover.
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
the outboard side of the seat. automatically during the seat tumble. No additional
actuation is necessary.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head

Restraint Fold Lever Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy
storage.
Automatic Folding Seatback
Tumbled Second Row Seat

6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
Seat In Storage Bin while the vehicle is in motion.
7. Close the storage bin cover. • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
To Unstow Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. • Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage lowered position could result in serious injury or
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat death in a collision. Always make sure the head 3
anchors. restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
Stow ’n Go Seat — Folded And Latched Position
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
mechanism to the “Unlocked” position. position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
WARNING! lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest
and seatback and tumble seat forward.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
(Continued)
1. Return the seatback to the upright position. 2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
Raising The Seatback Raising The Head Restraint

3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and
tumble seat forward.
Easy Entry Second Row
3
The second row Stow ’n Go seats allow easy entry to the
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head

Restraint Fold Lever
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy
entry into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Quad Seats — If Equipped

Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious 3
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline
Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean WARNING!
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Easy Entry
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,
the seat cushion. lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of
the seat and lift the seat forward.
Fold-Flat Quad Seat

Easy Entry Lever
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull Removal
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, push the
the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor
seatback and accessing the easy entry lever. latches. 3
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers

Cross Beam For Seat Removal
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
removable for added cargo space. and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
moved on its Easy Out Rollers.
Second Row Bench Seat
Release Handles
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-
tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
3
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstall-
ing these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped Third Row Power Seat Switch
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
for occupant comfort.
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row

The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
and the vehicle is in PARK. the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
NOTE:
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
3
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
1 — Open To Normal 3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
2 — Stow 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
and push the button again, for the desired position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side
of the head restraint.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”

3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the 4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.
seat to lower the seatback.
Release Strap “3”

5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Stowed Third Row Seat

To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the
anchors latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its 2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
full upright position. seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
3
WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
the tailgate mode.
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
lowered position could result in serious injury or handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
death in a collision. Always make sure the head some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
restraints are in their upright positions when the the bagged goods.
seat is to be occupied.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Tailgate Mode The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside
rotate the entire seat rearward. mirrors, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals (if
equipped), and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro- transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of
grammed to recall the same positions when the UN- the memory positions.
LOCK button is pushed.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable
pedals [if equipped] and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
Driver Memory Switch
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle must select the “RKE Linked To Memory” feature
Information Center (EVIC) will display which through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
memory position has been set. (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for 3
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a ing:
memory profile.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry 2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
Transmitter To Memory” in this section. NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
Transmitter To Memory instructions on how to set a memory profile.
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. To recall the memory setting for driver two, push
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UN-
instrument cluster. LOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory
Position 2.
5. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter within 10 seconds. A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK will occur before another recall can be selected.
button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
Memory Position Recall
memory mirror recall.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not Only)
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UN-
vehicle.
LOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory
position 1.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
key from the ignition switch. forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
or Easy Entry. 3
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. Entry and Easy Exit Position.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it or disabled through the programmable features in the
out of the LOCK position. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch the vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For further
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is information refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
To open the hood, two latches must be released. center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the
safety catch lever downward while raising the hood at
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument the same time.
panel, below the steering column.
Safety Lever Location

Hood Release Lever
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open LIGHTS
position. Headlight Switch
CAUTION! The headlight switch is located on the left side of the

instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of 3
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) interior lights and the fog lights.
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
for parking light and instrument panel light operation. When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation. on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the tion Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer Program-
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights mable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the Panel” for further information.
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF)
position. This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode. To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter- Lights-On Reminder
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled. ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the driver’s door is opened. 3
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho-
rized dealer. The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
will turn off in the normal manner. the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
feature.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the

parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push in the headlight switch control knob.
Pushing the headlight switch control knob in a second
time will turn the front fog lights off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight
switch.
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
Interior Lighting On NOTE: The ignition must be cycled to the OFF position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the for this feature to operate.
second detent (extreme top position) to turn on the Interior Lighting Off
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the
Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extreme 3
dimmer control is in this position.
bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the
Interior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate doors or liftgate are open.
is opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
extreme top. Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. This
feature brightens the odometer, radio and overhead
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi- displays when the parking lights or headlights are on.
mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if Halo Lights — If Equipped
one of the following occur: Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open. to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
locating specific features while driving at night.
• Any overhead reading light is left on.
The Halo control switch is located to the right of the
dimmer switch.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Halo Control
To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo
switch control upward or downward to in-
crease or decrease the lighting. Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the:
• Turn Signals
• Headlight Beams Low/High Turn Signal Warning
• Flash-To-Pass If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to
alert the driver. 3
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Lane Change Assist
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or three times then automatically turn off.
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside High/Low Beam Switch
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-
defective. function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
operation.
Flash-To-Pass To Activate
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un-
remain on until the lever is released. derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped mation.
The Automatic High Beam system provides increased NOTE: To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam
forward lighting at night by automating high beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle the
the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle multifunction lever (high beam lever) 6 full on/off cycles
specific light and automatically switches from high within 10 seconds of cycling the ignition to the ON
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out position. The system will return to the default setting
of view. when the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and tail- 2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights AUTO (A) position.
to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch 3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to to the on position.
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further infor-
Battery Protection
mation.
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing 3
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h). front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
To Deactivate when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
position and the headlight switch in any position other
Automatic High Beam system.
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center switch.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un-
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
mation.
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
position.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc- off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Washer And Wiper Controls

Intermittent Wiper System Windshield Washers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions To use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be- second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc- is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the 3
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter-
are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the val previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between several wipe cycles, then turn off.
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
Mist Feature
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Push the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward
Windshield Wiper Operation the steering column) to the first detent and release for a
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent single wiping cycle.
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper op-
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
eration. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
second detent past the intermittent settings for high-
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
speed wiper operation.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rear Wiper And Washer The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera-
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
tent interval.
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent when not using the system.
wiper speed only.
NOTE:
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and wiper speed is in the low or high position.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five shield.
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
feature. may reduce rain sensor performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmis-
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings sion shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or 3
the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the • Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
following conditions: with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), previously) exist.
or the outside temperature rises above freezing.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
steering column.
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps steering wheel to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Re-
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering mote Start
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated On models that are equipped with remote start, the
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to heated steering wheel can be programed to come on 3
approximately 95 minutes before automatically shutting during a remote start. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. ment Panel” for further information.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on
the center of the instrument panel below the climate WARNING!
controls. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
• Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
the heating element ON. spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
• Push the heated steering wheel button a second care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
time to turn the heating element OFF. cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the Adjustable Pedal Switch
steering wheel. Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
The switch is located on the left side of the steering
column. Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under-
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys- standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on information.
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be CAUTION! 3
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”). or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
NOTE: ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full adjustable pedal’s path.
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
WARNING!
the best possible seat/pedal position. Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you You could lose control and have an accident. Always
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
WARNING!
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. 3
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired You could lose control and have an accident. Always
vehicle set speed. leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be operate at the selected speed.
turned off when not in use.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate To Vary The Speed Setting
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL To Increase Speed
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with- crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
out erasing the set speed from memory.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
To Resume Speed The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed U.S. Speed (mph)
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph 3
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then
continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- continue to decrease until the button is released, then
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
WARNING!
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
vehicle set speed. Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF ParkSense Sensors
EQUIPPED The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
and audible indications of the distance between the rear within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 3
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
system and recommendations. orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
changed to the ON/RUN position. Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle strument Panel” for further information.
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSense Display
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status.
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Park Assist System ON

ParkSense Warning Display
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous. 3
Park Assist System OFF
Slow Tone
Fast Tone Continuous Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 79-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 3
(inches/cm) 79 inches (200 (200-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches (30
cm) cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2 Slow Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow
(Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing
Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the radio volume, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled through the During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC. Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center ignition cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea- ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
further information. Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
When ParkSense is disabled, the instrument cluster will shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after mak-
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in ing sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice,
REVERSE. mud, dirt and debris, see your authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC will
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors. • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the radio volume 3
when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
NOTE:
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense. a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further- • Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12
inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
WARNING!
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the EVIC. • Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
CAUTION! behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
can result in serious injury or death.
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
close proximity.
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
ParkSense.
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem- appears again.
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
3
feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
EQUIPPED out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear ⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen position.
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be NOTE: The programmable features of the Parkview Rear
displayed on the touchscreen along with a caution note to Backup Camera can be selected through the touchscreen.
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. Refer to your “Uconnect Supplement Manual” for further
After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView information.
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone:
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
drive path.
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. (Continued)
lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversation mirror,
optional power sliding door switches and an optional
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom- power liftgate switch.
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView. NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
3
above except sunglass storage.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incan-
descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-
age and conversation mirror. The premium front overhead
console model features a LED focused light that illuminates
the instrument panel cupholders, two swiveling LED
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Interior Lighting Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. From the closed position, push the door latch to open the
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
compartment.
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Push a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pushing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (pre-
mium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
Over Door Latch
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Conversation Mirror Position

Full Open Position NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by door can only be closed.
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, To return to the full open position, the door must first be
positioned for conversation mirror use. closed and then opened by pushing the latch again to
release.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Push the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pushing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional Reading Lights
arrows. Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/ 3
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
Overhead Compartment Features door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
1 — LCD Screen* 5 — Storage
battery.
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — LCD Screen*
3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
* If equipped, otherwise storage.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming. programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons.
3
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink For programming garage door openers that were manu-
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
indicator flashes. identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
Training The Garage Door Opener lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
1 — Door Opener from slow to rapid.
2 — Training Button
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices (Rolling Code)
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. follow these steps:
3
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two release the button.
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- steps.
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training. Programming A Non-Rolling Code
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the before 1995.
channels.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 • To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light erase the channels.
in view.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to (Non-Rolling Code)
program while you push and hold the hand-held To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
transmitter button. follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes release the button.
from slow to rapid. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
and observe the indicator light. remaining steps.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
several seconds of transmission. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when 3
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- fully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
time-out in the same manner. door may open and close while you are programming.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage and observe the indicator light.
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
NOTE: 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
ming is complete and the garage door/device should release the button.
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT follow all remaining steps.
erase the channels. Using HomeLink
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
programming, plug it back in at this time. button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
(Canadian/Gate Operator) system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, any time.
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Security • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle. • Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 3
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
erased. HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. WARNING!
Troubleshooting Tips • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
are some of the most common solutions: can cause serious injury or death.
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand- • Your motorized door or gate will open and close
held transmitter. while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
(Continued)
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or eration.
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
required by Federal safety standards. This includes by the party responsible for compliance could void the
most garage door opener models manufactured user’s authority to operate the equipment.
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
information or assistance. visors on the overhead console.
General Information
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly 3
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
Power Sunroof Switch your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
WARNING! • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
stop the sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actua-
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the Pinch Protect Feature
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
pushed again.
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half tion if this occurs.
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
Venting Sunroof — Express ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain 3
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
Ignition Off Operation directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
Information Center (EVIC)
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED

Instrument Panel Power Outlets
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The and element must be used.
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
CAUTION!
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor 3
will need to be replaced. console outlet.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Removable Console Power Outlet

On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con-
the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it trolled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
toward the instrument panel. support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Super Console Power Outlets

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. 3
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuses

1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with
Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with
Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will power outlet can cause damage.
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting. POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet converts DC current
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the to AC current, and is located on the left rear trim panel
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- immediately behind the second row left passenger seat.
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
3
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet,
the inverter should automatically reset. If the power
rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power in-
verter may have to be reset manually. To reset the
Power Inverter Outlet inverter manually push the power inverter button OFF
and ON. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the
panel below the climate controls.
inverter.
To turn on the power outlet, push the switch once. Push
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
WARNING!
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
To avoid serious injury or death: drawer just above the lower storage bin.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All
liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner
from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge
for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information. Front Cupholders
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Push down on the For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
container to engage the cupholder retention features. pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the
Super Console — If Equipped
cupholders.
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are 3
two cupholders located in the center of the console.
Rear Cupholders
Super Console Cupholders

Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped Interior Bottle Holders
On models equipped with premium center consoles, There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
there are four cupholders located on the top of the bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
console. panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-
dates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Premium Console Cupholders

Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the 3
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating. STORAGE
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes, Glove Compartments
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Upper Glove Compartment Lower Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, push in on the button, To open the lower compartment pull out on the release
located on the left side of the upper door. The door will handle.
automatically open.
Lower Compartment
Upper Compartment
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage. 3
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
1 — Bag Holder
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all 2 — Standard Pocket
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket. 3 — Mesh Pocket
Umbrella Holder Second Row Floor Storage Bins
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The area below the floor covers, located in front of the
the left front door entry scuff molding. second row seats, is available for storage.
Umbrella Holder Storage Bin Cover Lock Release

Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
WARNING!
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙unlocked⬙
position to allow greater access to the storage bin. In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
CAUTION! • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers 3
open.
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
while the vehicle is in motion.
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal • Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
injury or damage to your vehicle: vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your CAUTION!
vehicle is unattended.
• Donot allow children to have access to the second The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
young children may not be able to escape. If which have minimal clearance to the cover.
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
suffocation or heat stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an
storage bin covers are not properly latched. Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha-
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers nism.
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage — If
Equipped
The overhead storage system comes in several options.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from Overhead Console Features
1 — LCD Screen* 5 — Storage
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark 2 — Rear HVAC 6 — LCD Screen*
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha- 3 — Courtesy Lights 7 — Courtesy Lights
nism. 4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
* If equipped, otherwise storage.
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
CONSOLE FEATURES • The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
bin.
There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and
Super. • The basic console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
WARNING! the console base. 3
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart- To Remove The Basic Floor Console
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the 1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision. 2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
Basic Console
3. Remove the console.
Basic Console features consist of the following:
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second. 1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
higher than the rear).
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are 2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
dishwasher safe for cleaning. hook.
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole • Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean-
is centered on the winch hole. ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
cups or mugs with handles
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the • Top tray storage
cover plug.
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. or other items
• Large console center storage will store headphones for
WARNING! the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
In an accident, serious injury could result if the items
removable floor console is not properly installed. • 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully inside the console for cell phones or other electronics
latched.
• Rear occupant accessible
Premium Console — If Equipped
• Multiple adjustments
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage • Removable from vehicle for additional floor space
bin offers multiple configurations.
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles. 3
Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
and a convenient storage tray.
Console Position 1
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
storage area below. the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 2 Console Position 3

Dual Storage Bins Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly 3
higher than the front).
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket.
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
Console Position 4
To Remove The Premium Floor Console 5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
console.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
centimeters.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Super Console — If Equipped

The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin
and rear pull out drawer.
The Super Console contains a pass through storage area Front Lower Pass Through
accessible for both the driver and front passenger. The Super Console tambour doors are opened by push-
ing down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The
front tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door
slides rearward.
NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Located in the back of the Super Console is a storage 3
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
Super Console
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
Rear Drawer Storage

REAR WINDOW FEATURES
CAUTION!
Rear Window Defroster
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
The rear window defroster button is located on the heating elements:
the climate control (Mode) knob. Push this button • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap- heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of soaking with warm water.
operation, push the button a second time. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
NOTE: window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
by pushing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
plus that on the external rack does not exceed the
conditions.
maximum vehicle load capacity. 3
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the
crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
Deploying The Crossbars
Loosening Crossbars
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar CAUTION!
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side. Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
Deployed Position
Stowed Position
Then, position the crossbars across the roof. Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in
crossbars into the deployed positions.
any two of the three deploy positions.
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation

Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the Stowing The Crossbars
thumb screws completely. Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again, taking
care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars are
identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once the
crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely. 3
Tightening Crossbar
NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
CAUTION!
with rail tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplemen- • Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten
tary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha- thumb screws as necessary.
nisms with the tie loops. • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed.
• The load should be secured and placed on top of
the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or other protective layer between the load
and the roof surface.
Rail Tie Loops
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
frontal area should be secured to both the front and vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per- 3
rear of the vehicle. sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may Sun screens are available for second and third row
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted Sun Screen Extended

Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
top of the window. base sill.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .312 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .346 4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .318
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .322
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ White Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .355 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .367
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped . . .356
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .375
▫ Turn Menu Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
䡵 UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . .376
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .376
䡵 UCONNECT ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Operating Instructions
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .387
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped. . . . .366
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .387
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . .388
䡵 UCONNECT 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If ▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .393
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .406 4
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . .408
▫ Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device
▫ Play A DVD Using The VES Player — If
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Play A Blu-ray Disc Using The Blu-ray
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Player — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .399 ▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
䡵 UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) — IF ▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ VES Remote Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Information Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Blu-ray Player Remote Control — If ▫ Numeric Keypad Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Station List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .423
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . .432
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Disc Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Blu-ray Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Product Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .427
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Shared Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
䡵 CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc MAINTENANCE . . . . .447 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 4
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Vents 5 — Analog Clock 9 — DVD – If Equipped 13 — Ignition Switch

2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Upper Glove Compartment 10 — Storage Bin 14 — Hood Release
3 — Shift Lever 7 — Lower Glove Compartment 11 — Cup Holders 15 — Dimmer Switch
4 — Radio 8 — Climate Controls 12 — Switch Bank 16 — Headlight Switch
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
1. Tachometer make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area, that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage. must be reset at zero.
2. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to
Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odom- wheel) to access or reset the display.
eter display shows the total distance the vehicle has been
driven. Message Display Area
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the odometer messages will display:
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
technician should leave the odometer reading the same LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in noFUSE
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
located in the instrument cluster. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
If Equipped” in this section for further information. eter display area. Refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information on fuses and fuse loca- 4
LoW tirE
tions.
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
CHAngE OIL
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The odometer display will toggle be-
gASCAP
tween CHAngE and Oil for approximately 12 seconds,
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display indicator system is duty cycle-based, which means the
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the your personal driving style.
message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN Equipped
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features
performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument
following steps. cluster. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do (EVIC)” in this section for further information.
not start the engine).
3. Speedometer
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times • Indicates vehicle speed.
within 10 seconds.
4. Fuel Gauge
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps. vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
WARNING!
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi- A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
cates that the engine cooling system is operating others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
satisfactorily. coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem- for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your 4
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
upper limits of the normal operating range. System Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
1. Tachometer U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area, correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage. odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
Equipped / Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Dis- then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must 4
play be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
Equipped make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
must be reset at zero.
instrument cluster. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)” in this section for further informa- This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or
tion. L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to
Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odom-
wheel) to access or reset the display.
eter display shows the total distance the vehicle has been
driven.
Message Display Area gASCAP
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
odometer messages will display: filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault message. If the problem continues, the message will
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault appear the next time the vehicle is started.
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required noFUSE
LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or damaged, a
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display
located in the instrument cluster. area. Refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — further information on fuses and fuse locations.
If Equipped” in this section for further information. CHAngE OIL
LoW tirE Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer dis- cator system. The odometer display will toggle between
play will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles. CHAngE and Oil for approximately 12 seconds, after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled 3. Speedometer
oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system • Indicates vehicle speed.
is duty cycle-based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal 4. Fuel Gauge
driving style. • The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
4
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after vehicle where the fuel door is located.
performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the
5. Temperature Gauge
following steps.
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
not start the engine). cates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times satisfactorily.
within 10 seconds. • The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you upper limits of the normal operating range.
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
and call an authorized dealer for service. which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
WARNING! event of a failure indication.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling system check menu may appear different based upon
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to telltales are optional and may not appear.
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Bag Warning Light 4
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that 4
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
United States the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
Canada
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
dropped below a specified level.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
the brake fluid level checked. detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
WARNING! applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase 4
engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙ this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this
case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes du-
ration is expired, whichever come first.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de- 4
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the trans- 4
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- If you continue operating the vehicle when the
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
severe transmission damage or transmission failure. nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light 4
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
4
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The 4
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
converter damage and power loss will soon occur. as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
Immediate service is required. in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these 4
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
In any situation in which the message on the display is ⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to
refer to the contents of the ⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical data⬙ chapter, strictly com-
plying with the indications that you find there.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible. vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
those tires. maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
low tire pressure telltale.
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to approximately one minute and then remain continuously
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
CAUTION!
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety The TPMS has been optimized for the original
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the warning have been established for the tire size
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tion or sensor damage may result when using re- 4
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the placement equipment that is not of the same size,
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
to continue to function properly. sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Tell-
What It Means
tale Light
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se-
lected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
What It Means
Light
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
White Telltale Indicator Light
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Cruise Control Cancelled Light 4
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to
“Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further in-
formation.
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
• Fuel Economy
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Speed
instrument cluster. • Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP button to scroll up-
wheel:
ward through the main menu items (Fuel
Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Mes-
sages, Units, System Setup).
• DOWN Button 4
Push and release the DOWN button to scroll

downward through the main menu items.
• RIGHT Button
The RIGHT button allows access to informa-
tion in EVIC submenus, selects some feature
settings, and resets some EVIC features. The
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
EVIC prompts the driver when the RIGHT
button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
Once the RIGHT button has been selected for the desired The main display area will normally display the main
submenu list, follow the EVIC prompts to properly select menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
the desired submenu EVIC features. menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
• BACK Button
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Push and release the BACK button to scroll into several categories:
back to a previous menu or sub-menu. • Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) message takes control of the main display area for five
Displays seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
The EVIC display consists of three sections: the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
1. The top line where compass direction and outside reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
temperature are displayed. as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
messages are displayed. message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure.⬙
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom-
eter line.
• Unstored Messages The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). the following messages:
• Unstored Messages Until RUN • Key in ignition 4
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start • Ignition or Accessory On
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake • Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
Pedal and Push Button to Start.⬙
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Five Second Unstored Messages
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes-
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds • Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this • Remote start active — Push Start Button
message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in
Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On.⬙ • Remote start active — Key to Run
• Wrong Key • Turn Signal On
• Damaged Key • RKE Battery Low
• Key not programmed • Service Keyless System
• Vehicle Not in Park • Low Washer Fluid
• Key Left Vehicle • Oil Change Required
• Key Not Detected • Check Gascap
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start • Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
moving)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Low Tire Pressure
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor-
• Park Assist Disabled
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
• Service Park Assist System
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX” • Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
• Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed Oil Change Required
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
Spot System has been turned off. indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is display in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) onds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block- next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change 4
age, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ con- indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
ditions. When this message is displayed, both outside engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic inter- your personal driving style.
ference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
icon only on the side of interference as long as inter- time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
ference is present. or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if equipped
• Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis- with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the message tempo-
played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) rarily, push and release the BACK button. To reset the oil
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will change indicator system (after performing the scheduled
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn- maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If
this message is present, see an authorized dealer.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). Fuel Economy
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
within 10 seconds. Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the
RIGHT button. The following Fuel Economy functions
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE display in the EVIC:
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position. • Average Fuel Economy (AVG)
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go • Distance To Empty (DTE)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do • Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
not start the engine).
Average Fuel Economy
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
within 10 seconds. Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. prompt in the EVIC to use the RIGHT button. When the
fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for two
seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
and the averaging will continue from the last fuel aver- tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT
age reading before the reset. arrow button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. 4
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Average Fuel Economy Display Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Distance To Empty (DTE) This display shows the instantaneous MPG or L/100 km
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with in bar graph form while driving. This will monitor the
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is gas mileage in real-time as you drive and can be used to
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Vehicle Speed Trip A
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle • Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the last reset.
RIGHT arrow button. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to display the current speed in mph or km/h. • Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the
last reset.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button a second time will
toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h. Trip B
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle • Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the last reset.
EVIC.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the
Trip Info last reset.
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip Elapsed Time
Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and push the RIGHT
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
button. Push and release the UP/DOWN buttons to
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
highlight one of the following functions if you want to
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
reset it:
or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function and release the RIGHT button until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
been selected.
selected (highlighted). Push and hold the RIGHT button
to clear the resettable function being displayed. Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Tire Pressure Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
4
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button Info” displays in the EVIC. Then, push and release the
until “Tire PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. RIGHT button. Push and release the UP and DOWN
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to view button to scroll through the available information dis-
a graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at plays, then push and release RIGHT to display any one of
each corner of the graphic. the following choices.
• Coolant Temp
Units
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Push and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and push the RIGHT • Oil Temp
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
Displays the actual oil temperature.
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or • Oil Pressure
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then push Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Engine Hours Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Compass / Temperature Display
Messages #
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
facing. The EVIC will display eight or fifteen compass
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
readings and the outside temperature.
sages (in the # place holder). Pushing the RIGHT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Push NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
than one message to step through the remaining stored be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
messages. Pushing the BACK button takes you back to ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
the Main Menu. displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed to
change ignition switch position, current ignition status
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC
display to the right of the odometer value.
Automatic Compass Calibration 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button until the
System Setup (Customer-Programmable Features)
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
menu is reached, then push and release the RIGHT
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
button.
new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or 3. Push and releasethe DOWN button until “Calibrate
more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal Compass” is displayed in the EVIC then push and 4
or metallic objects). The compass will now function release the RIGHT button.
normally.
4. Push and release the RIGHT button to start the
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in
an environment free from large metallic objects such as the EVIC.
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
etc.
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
Manual Compass Calibration “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator function normally.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass Compass Variance Map
module is located, and it can cause interference with the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button until the
Setup (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is
reached, then push the RIGHT button.
3. Push and release the DOWN button until the “Com- message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE
pass Variance” message is displayed in the EVIC, then NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System
press the RIGHT button. The last variance zone num- Setup” from the main menu.
ber displays in the EVIC. Push and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System
4. Push and release the RIGHT button until the proper Setup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then
variance zone is selected, according to the map. push and release the RIGHT button to enter the System 4
Setup sub-menu. Push and release the UP or DOWN
5. Push and release the RETURN button to exit. button to select a feature form the following choices:
Turn Menu Off Language
Push and release RIGHT arrow button to turn the menu When in this display you may select one of three lan-
off. guages for all display screens, including the trip func-
Customer-Programmable Features (System tions and the navigation system (if equipped). Push and
Setup) release the UP or DOWN button while in this display and
scroll through the language choices. Push and release the
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
RIGHT button to select English, Spanish (Español), or
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
French (Français). Then, as you continue, the information
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
will display in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
utilizes voice commands, guiding you through the drive
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
route mile by mile, turn-by-turn, until the final destina-
operating information.
tion is reached. To make your selection, push and release
the RIGHT button until a check-mark appears next to the Auto Lock Doors
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
When selected, all doors will lock automatically when the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make
deactivated.
your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow button
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System — If until a check-mark appears.
Equipped
Auto Unlock Doors
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
opened. To make your selection, push and release the
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
Right arrow button until a check-mark appears next to
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
the feature showing the system has been activated, or the RKE Linked To Memory- If Equipped
check-mark is removed showing the system has been When this feature is selected, the memory seat, mirror,
deactivated. and radio settings will return to the memory set position
Remote Unlock Sequence when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pushed. If
this feature is not selected, then the memory seat, mirror,
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set 4
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the
position using the door mounted switch. To make your
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK but-
selection, push and release the RIGHT button until a
ton. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press, you
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors
showing the system has been deactivated.
On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on
the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To Remote Start Comfort Sys.
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow When this feature is selected and the remote start is
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
is removed showing the system has been deactivated. These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is cycled to ON/RUN
position. To make your selection, push and release the
RIGHT arrow button until a check-mark appears next to showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
the feature showing the system has been activated or the is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
deactivated.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
Horn With Remote Lock will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will make your selection, push and release the RIGHT button
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pushed. until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT the system has been activated or the check-mark is
arrow button until a check-mark appears next to the removed showing the system has been deactivated.
feature showing the system has been activated or the
Headlamp Off Delay
deactivated. When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Flash Lamps With Lock
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
When selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. To then push and release the RIGHT button until a check-
make your selection, push and release the RIGHT arrow mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available With Auto the RIGHT button until a check-mark appears next to the
Headlights Only) feature showing the system has been activated or the
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned Key-Off Power Delay 4
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
When this feature is selected, the power window
selection, push and release the RIGHT button until a
switches, radio, Uconnect phone (if equipped), DVD
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
setting has been selected.
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
Features Of Your Vehicle.” highlighted, then push and release the RIGHT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
that the setting has been selected.
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, push and release
Illuminated Approach signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, push and
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
release the RIGHT button until a check-mark appears
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
tion, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
been deactivated.
highlighted, then push and release the RIGHT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) — If Equipped
that the setting has been selected.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to or unlock buttons. To make your selection, push and
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And release the RIGHT button until a check-mark appears
Operating” for system function and operating informa- next to the feature showing the system has been acti-
tion. To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT vated, or the check-mark is removed showing the system
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. has been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
Flashers With Sliding Door
Easy Exit Seat
When this feature is selected, the signal lamps activate
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, push and release the showing the system has been activated, or the check-
RIGHT button until a check-mark appears next to the mark is removed showing the system has been deacti-
feature showing the system has been activated or the vated.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
deactivated.
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights,” “Blind Spot Alert 4
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set Lights/CHM,” and “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a
Tilt Mirror In Reverse — If Equipped visual alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert
feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in
CHM” mode. In this mode, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward
will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and
an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
Spot Alert Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT
system is deactivated.
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
To make your selection, push and release the RIGHT UCONNECT 430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature, EQUIPPED
showing the system has been activated, or the check- Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for detailed
mark is removed, showing the system has been deacti- operating instructions.
vated.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in — If Equipped
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result Equipped
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further details.
Calibrate Compass
Push the RIGHT arrow button to calibrate the compass.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
UCONNECT 130 Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
4
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Push the right switch
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
position to operate the radio. will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, push any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
RW/FF
TIME Button
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
radio frequency. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SCROLL control knob.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will begin to blink. will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save time change.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton 4
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memory
treble tones. When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
sound level from the right or left side speakers. this station and push and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pushing the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers. You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Push
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM MP3 Audio Play
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
NOTE:
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pushing the pushbutton twice. • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Buttons 1 - 6
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
stations).
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
DISC Button
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
AM/FM modes to Disc modes. radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
show the track number, and index time in minutes and other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD 4

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
away and jam the player mechanism.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
• The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player. Do not
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
(Continued) NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped.)
SEEK Button AM/FM Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
CD and MP3 modes. change of pace.
TIME Button Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
RW/FF Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Push and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or file recording media and formats are limited. When
RW or another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
button operates in a similar manner. tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 4
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
When reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- character extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255 writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of in longer disc loading times.
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Sampling Fre-
Bit Rate (kbps)
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Specification quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is Layer 3 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit 56, 48, 40, 32,
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files 24, 16, 8
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rate. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files. Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which 4
by the following: allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
system to amplify the source and play through the
CD-R media
vehicle speakers.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pushing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
to load than non-multisession discs auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
increase with more files and folders device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
Push this button to change the display to time of day. The NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is ACC position to operate the radio.
OFF).
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect 130
SEEK Buttons If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make Phone Button Uconnect Phone — If Equipped
another selection. Holding either button will bypass 4
Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped details.
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
tures Of Your Vehicle.” available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone — If Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Equipped screen.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature TIME Button
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
details. radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, push the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, push the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
trol knob to save time change. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, push any button/knob or wait five seconds. AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button. TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, push the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade. 4
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
treble tones. lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
16-Digit Character 16-Digit Character

Program Type Program Type
Display Display
No program type None Public Public
or undefined Rhythm and Blues R&B
Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Music Rel Musc
Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk
Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock
College College Soft Soft
Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck
Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Information Inform Sports Sports
Jazz Jazz Talk Talk
News News Top 40 Top 40
Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con-
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency trol knob. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
station with the same selected Music Type name. The save time change.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
AM/FM Button
mode.
Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type 4
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. Memory
SETUP Button When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET/RND
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
the following items:
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
• Set Clock — Pushing the SELECT button will allow station and push and release that button. If a button is not
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the selected within five seconds after pushing the SET/RND
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the button, the station will continue to play but will not be
hours, push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set stored into pushbutton memory.
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and MP3 Audio Play
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
NOTE:
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
pushing the pushbutton twice. position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display. recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Buttons 1 - 6
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations). Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
DISC/AUX Button
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Pushing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode. 1.0 inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must
be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
will show the track number, and index time in minutes other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD 4

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs Push the EJECT button to eject the CD.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
away and jam the player mechanism.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
• The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player. Do not
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
(Continued)
SEEK Button AM/FM Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Push the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of Push this button while the CD is playing to activate
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
CD and MP3 modes. change of pace.
TIME Button Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Push the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button file recording media and formats are limited. When
works in a similar manner. writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 4
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
When reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- character extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255 writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of in longer disc loading times.
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Sampling Fre-
Bit Rate (kbps)
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Specification quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is Layer 3 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit 56, 48, 40, 32,
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files 24, 16, 8
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
time to start playing the MP3 files. folder by pushing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the 4
by the following: next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Push the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more
before writing to the disc. and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Push this button to change the display to time of day. The
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 Uconnect (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
the source and play through the vehicle speakers. ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
iary device if the AUX jack is connected. Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume limited coverage in Alaska.
down.
System Activation To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you ESN/SID Access
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
tion and the radio on, push the SETUP button and scroll
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
come kit that contains general information, including 4
selected. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
display will time out in two minutes. Push any button on
visit the Sirius web site at www.siriusxm.com, or at
the radio to exit this screen.
www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents.
Selecting Uconnect (Satellite) Mode
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) Push the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Please have the following information available when
mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID). To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as Operating Instructions — Uconnect (Satellite)
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Mode
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
on or above the antenna.
ACC position to operate the radio.
Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
structure or under a physical obstacle. will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception. Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can tinuing to the next. To stop the search, push the SCAN
cause signal blockage. button a second time.
INFO Button MUSIC TYPE Button
Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- mode for five seconds. Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button
able). Also, pushing and holding the INFO button for an or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
additional three seconds will make the radio display the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
Song Title all of the time (push and hold again to return lected. 4
to normal display).
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
RW/FF type.
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows. channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary) If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
following items:
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Push the AUDIO/ allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription. twice.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, push the SET button. The Buttons 1 - 6
symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and push and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but- Operating Instructions (Uconnect Phone) — If
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be Equipped
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” for further details.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-
correct. ment.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may 4
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod or
external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
Setting The Analog Clock plays media, but does not use the iPod / MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external where the iPod or consumer electronic audio device cable
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is can be routed through without damaging the cable when
closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable without
located in the glove compartment.
damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is not
available in the glove compartment, route the cable away
from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to
close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
USB Port
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
By using an external USB device to connect to the USB
port: Play Mode
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound When switched to iPod/USB/MP3 control mode, the
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play
etc.) information on the radio display. mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio 4
faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
device and display data:
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
previous track.
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device). • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or push the VR
Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the iPod/USB/MP3 control mode and access a • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button will jump to the previous track in the list or push the
on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod/USB/MP3
• Jump backward in the current track by pushing and the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button have been viewed, the last INFO button push will go
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current back to the play mode screen on the radio.
track.
• Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio
• Jump forward in the current track by pushing and device mode to repeat the current playing track or
holding the FF >> button. push the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙
• A single push backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec- • Push the SCAN button to use iPod/USB/MP3 device
onds. scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
previous or next track. Pushing the SEEK >> button
desired track, when it is playing the track, push the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pushing the
list, or push the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
Track.⬙
and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, push the INFO button to see
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pushing the INFO button again jumps to
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB
device, or push the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio in updating the information on the radio display may
display, then the shuffle mode is ON. be noticeable.
List Or Browse Mode During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
During Play mode, pushing any of the buttons described
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) 4
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
to get to the track faster.
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device. In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in
USB device:
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device
or external USB device. • Preset 1 – Playlists
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise • Preset 2 – Artists
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
• Preset 3 – Albums
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, push the • Preset 4 – Genres
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on
CAUTION!
the top line and the first item in that list on the second
line. • Leaving the iPod or external USB device (or any
To exit List mode without selecting a track, push the supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode. treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam-
age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level guidelines.
menu of the iPod or external USB device. • Placing items on the iPod or external USB device,
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item or connections to the iPod or external USB device
to be selected and push the TUNE control knob. This in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio and/or to the connectors.
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod or external USB device WARNING!
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio could result in an accident.
device.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) Selecting A Different Audio Device
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 1. Push the Phone button to begin.
Uconnect phone system.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for further ⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
information on Bluetooth connectivity.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect 4
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons phone system to list the audio devices.
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the Next Track
radio or push the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio.” Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR button on
the radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next
Play Mode music track on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can Previous Track
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR button
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect on the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the previous music track on your cellular phone.
Uconnect phone system, but just one can be selected and
played.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO

ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) — IF EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES) is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review Video Entertainment System (VES)
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features • Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
and operation.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standard
Getting Started DVD player or a Blu-ray Disc Player. If equipped with
• Screen(s) located in the overhead console: Unfold the a Blu-ray Disc Player, the icon will be present on the
overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the Player.
overhead console behind the screen(s).
• Turn on the Player (if equipped on Dual Screen Sys- Blu-ray Disc Player
tem) by pushing the Power button, located on the far
Play A Blu-ray Disc
left, or by pushing the button on the Remote Control.
To view a Blu-ray disc, insert the disc into the Blu-ray
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu- VES disc Player. Playback will begin automatically after
ray Disc is inserted into the VES player, the screen(s) the Blu-ray is recognized by the disc drive. If playback
turn(s) on automatically, the headphone transmitters does not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into 4
turn on and playback begins. the Blu-ray Player push the play button. If playback does
• For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 Blu-ray VES disc Player follow these steps:
(second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control Using The Touchscreen Radio
and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to
the Dual Video Screen section for more information. • Push the MENU button on the faceplate, then press the
Rear VES button on the touchscreen. If a chapter list
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occu- appears on the right side of the screen, press the hide
pants using either the touchscreen radio, the DVD or list button on the touchscreen to display the Rear VES
Blu-ray Disc Player, or by the rear seat occupants using control screen.
the remote control.
• Press the 1 button on the touchscreen to select an audio • Not all Blu-ray, CD or DVD discs will automatically
channel, then press the VES Disc button on the touch- restart from where you left off at when turned off. Some
screen in the media column. discs will restart from the beginning, others will restart
from where you left off at, and some will ask you if you
Using The Remote Control would like to continue or start from the beginning.
• Select an audio channel (Channel 1 for 2nd row screen
Play Video Games
and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen), then push the
source key and select VES Disc from the menu. Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks or HDMI port, located on the left side behind
• Push popup/menu key to navigate disc menu and op- the second row seat.
tions.
NOTE:
• Due to the size of the content on a Blu-ray Disc, the
disc may not start playing immediately.
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter 4
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
RCA/HDMI/USB Inputs
1 — HDMI Port 4 — USB Ports (Charge Only)
2 — Audio/Video In 5 — Power Inverter
3 — Power Outlet
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
1, by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push
ENTER on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen

Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to 3. Press the 1 button on the touchscreen and then press
display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is either AUX 1 or AUX 2 in the VES column (depending
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch- which AUX input is used). To exit press the back arrow
screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen. button at the top of the touchscreen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen Select Channel/Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES
Column
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either push Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
1. Press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
source appears on the screen.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to 3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is video is playing on Channel 1, press the 2 button on
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch- the touchscreen and choose an audio source. To exit
screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen. press the back arrow button on the touchscreen at the
top left of the left screen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen

Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
Dual Video Screen 2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES).
starts playing the first track.
• The Remote Control
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen-
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped) gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
NOTE: Headunit DVD player does not play Blu-ray
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
Discs.
on Channel 2.
1. Push the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD button on the radio
faceplate (Touchscreen).
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by NOTE:
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
repeatedly pushing the SOURCE button, then push
on the left side of the screen.
ENTER/OK.
on the right side of the screen.
4
• The VES will retain the last setting when turned off.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen

2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to 3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the
display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA col-
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch- umn. To exit press the back arrow button at the top left
screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen. of the screen.
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO/MEDIA
button on the radio faceplate, then press the DISC tab
button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO
button on the touchscreen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen

• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not NOTE: The VES player has basic DVD control function
available in all states/provinces. If available, the ve- such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
hicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the
2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen-
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic trans-
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
mission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the
switch is on Channel 1.
parking brake must be engaged.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers, 4
• Pressing the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func-
on Channel 2.
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner Using The Remote Control
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
Play A DVD Using The VES Player — If Equipped
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES
player automatically selects the appropriate mode
after the disc is recognized and starts playing the
DVD.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES DISC by NOTE:
on the left side of the screen.
ENTER/OK on the Remote Control.
on the right side of the screen.
2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select VES DISC Mode On The VES Screen

Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the NOTE:
DISC button on the touchscreen in the VES column. To
• To view a DVD on the radio push the RADIO/MEDIA
exit press the back arrow button on the touchscreen at
button on the radio faceplate, then press the DISC tab
the top left of the screen.
button on the touchscreen and then the VIEW VIDEO
button on the touchscreen.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not 3. To watch a Blu-ray Disc on Screen 2 for third row
available in all states/provinces. If available, the ve- passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Head-
hicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the phone switch is on Channel 2.
PARK position for vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the
parking brake must be engaged. 1. Push the SOURCE button on the Blu-ray Player Re-
mote Control.
Play A Blu-ray Disc Using The Blu-ray Player — If
Equipped 2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight Blu-ray by
1. Insert the Blu-ray Disc with the label facing up. The
Blu-ray Player automatically selects the appropriate
OK on the Remote Control.
mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing
the Blu-ray Disc. NOTE:
NOTE: The Blu-ray Player has basic control functions • Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop. on the left side of the screen.
2. To watch a Blu-ray Disc on Screen 1 for second row • Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Head- on the right side of the screen.
phone switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls • Viewing a Blu-ray Disc on the Touchscreen radio
screen is not available in all states/provinces. If avail-
able, the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever
2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to must be in the PARK position for vehicles with an
display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is automatic transmission. In vehicles with a manual
displayed, press the HIDE LIST button on the touch- transmission the parking brake must be engaged.
screen to display the Rear VES Controls screen. 4
Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen and then the Playing
VES Disc button on the touchscreen in the VES col- Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on
umn. To exit press the back arrow button at the top left the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1
of the screen. (second row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio. If
NOTE: watching a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1
could be used for audio.
• To view a Blu-ray Disc on the radio, push the RADIO/
MEDIA button on the radio faceplate, then press the
VES Disc tab button on the touchscreen and then the
VIEW VIDEO button on the touchscreen.
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either push Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen

2. Press the Rear VES button on the touchscreen to display
the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed,
press the HIDE LIST button on the touchscreen to
display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Rear VES Button On The Touchscreen Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a Column
video is playing on Channel 1, press the 2 button on Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
the touchscreen and choose an audio source. To exit • VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
press the back arrow button at the top left of the left and video simultaneously.
screen.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and VES Remote Control — If Equipped
Blu-ray Discs.
• The DVD Player can play CDs and DVDs.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and the right side equates to Channel 2.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
source will display on the second row screen or Screen
1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video
source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2
and can be heard on Channel 2.
• The 2nd row screen and 3rd row screen of the Video VES Remote Control
Entertainment System can play two separate discs by Controls And Indicators
utilizing the touchscreen radio DVD player and Blu-
ray Disc Player. 1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
when the screen(s) are closed. button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is 6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, push to select to the
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel previous station. In disc modes, push to advance to the
button is illuminated momentarily. start of the current or previous audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after 7. POP UP/MENU – Push to return to the main menu of
five seconds. a DVD disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the 4
Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which
RANDOM for a CD).
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, 8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
the remote controls the functionality of headphone
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play
Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector
switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls 10. PROG Up/Down / Rewind/skip back and fast fwd/
the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of skip forward – When listening to a radio mode,
the screen). pushing PROG Up selects the next preset and push-
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, push to seek the next tunable
the radio. When listening to compress audio on a
station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast forward
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc selected and the disc is stopped, push the SETUP
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Down selects the previous disc. Setup Menu of this manual.)
11. MUTE – Push to mute the headphone audio output 16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, push to
for the selected channel. return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
12. SLOW – If Equipped – Push to slow playback of a
contents.
DVD disc. Push play (䉴) to resume normal play.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, push to seek to the previous
13. STATUS – If Equipped – Push to display the current
tunable station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast
status.
rewind through the current audio track or video
14. MODE/SOURCE – Push to change the mode of the chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
selected channel. See the Mode Selection section of
18. ENTER/OK – Push to select the highlighted option
this manual for details on changing modes.
in a menu.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, push the SETUP
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, push to select to the next
button to access the display settings (see the display
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the next
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
navigate in the menu.
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES mode is
Blu-ray Player Remote Control — If Equipped audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE – Push to enter Source Selection screen. 4
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which

channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan-
nel 1 (second row). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (third row).
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators 5. 䉴 – Push to navigate menus.
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone 6. SETUP – Push to access the Blu-ray Setup menu
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear screen. When a disc is loaded in the Blu-ray player (if
equipped) and the VES mode is selected and the disc 13. 䉳䉳 – Push and release to jump to the previous audio
is stopped, push the SETUP button to access the track or video chapter. Push and hold to fast rewind
Blu-ray Setup menu. through the current audio track or video chapter.
7. 䉴䉴 – Push and release to jump to the next available 14. – Mutes headphone audio.
audio track or video chapter. Push and hold to fast
15. BACK – Push to exit out of menus or return to source
forward through the current audio track or video
selection screen.
chapter.
16. 䉲 – Push to navigate menus.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
17. OK – Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.
9. Four Colored Buttons – Push to access Blu-ray Disc
features. 18. 䉳 – Push to navigate menus.
10. POPUP/MENU – Push to access the Blu-ray main 19. 䉱 – Push to navigate menus.
menu when in Blu-ray or DVD mode. Push to start
Remote Control Storage
Scan or start Random track functions in CD or HDD
modes. The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
11. KEYPAD – Push to navigate chapters or titles. screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
12. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play. finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very Locking The Remote Control
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the parental control feature.
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back • To disable the Remote Control from making any
into position. changes, push the Video Lock button on the DVD
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped 4
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
indicate when Video Lock is active.
• Pushing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
eration. To replace the batteries:
VES Remote Control Storage 1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
VES Headphones
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down 1 — Volume Control 3 — Channel Selection Switch
position and that the channel is not muted and the 2 — Power Button 4 — Power Indicator
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Blu-ray Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to 4
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
Blu-ray VES Headphones
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones. 1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
Controls NOTE:
The headphone power indicator and controls are located • When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
on the right ear cup. controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES Channel 1.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve • When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
approximately three minutes after the rear video system to the audio of the VES Channel 2.
is turned off. 2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status
switch is in the same position as the headphone on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
selector switch. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi- Warranty
gate to the available modes and push the OK button to Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
select the new mode. the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire-
BACK button on the remote control. less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer- 4
able.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover use is defective in workmanship or materials.
downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will
does not cover any damage or defect that results from repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired re-
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace- WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR-
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT- RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE- WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, If you have any questions or comments regarding your
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU- Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-3332
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not phone at 1-888-293-3332.
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
System Information the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM), SEEK, SCAN,
TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is
Shared Modes
not in shared mode.
This allows the VES to output radio sources to the
When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES
headphones and the radio to output VES sources to the
have control of the video functions. The VES has the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES channel 1 or 2
ability to control the following video modes: 4
are in the same (shared) mode, a VES icon will be visible
on the radio’s display for that channel, and the shared 1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
icon will be visible on the VES screen. When in shared Up/Down.
mode, the same audio source is heard in the shared
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared Scan, and Track Up/Down).
mode with the VES, only the radio is able to control the
The VES can even control radio modes or video modes
radio functions. In this case, VES can share the radio
while the radio is turned off. The VES can access the
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
changed to a mode that is different from the VES selected
on the VES and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority over the
VES or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT). The VES has
Information Mode Display Numeric Keypad Menu
Information Mode Video Screen Display

1 — Channel 1 Mode 7 — Channel 1 ENTER/OK
2 — Channel 1 Shared Status Button Action
Numeric Keypad Menu
3 — Channel 1 Audio Only/ 8 — Channel 2 ENTER/OK When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
Mute Button Action shows DIRECT TUNE, pushing the remote control’s OK
4 — Channel 2 Mode 9 — Clock button activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen
5 — Channel 2 Shared Status 10 — Video Lock
6 — Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute 11 — Not Available / Error
makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, satellite
channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit:
1. Push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, 䉴, Disc Menu
䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, push the remote con-
trol’s ENTER/OK button to select the digit. Repeat
these steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and 4
push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pushing the remote
Disc Menu For CDs
control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list of all
available channels. Navigate this list using the remote When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
station, push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to tune list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
to that station. To jump through the list more quickly, Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play
navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen. and Random play.
Display Settings Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote screen closed:
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
1. Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set 2. Close the video screen.
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
3. To change the current audio mode, push the remote
settings under normal circumstances.
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga- the next available audio mode without using the
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
menu option and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
button.
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote are installed in the headphones.
player.
Disc Formats • CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types • DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter): profile 3.0
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see Compressed Video Files (DivX)
notes about DVD Region Codes) The Blu-Ray Player is capable of playing DivX files from 4
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only) a CD disc (usually a CD-R, CD-RW) or a DVD disc
(usually a DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW or DVD+RW).
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• The Blu-Ray Player always uses the file extension to
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
determine the video format, so DivX files must always
format files end with the extension “.div”, “divx” or “.avi.” To
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression) prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions
for any other types of files.
The Blu-Ray Player is capable of the playing the follow-
ing types of discs (12 cm diameter): • For DivX files, only DivX Home Theater Profile Ver.3.0
is supported.
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV
• Any file that is copy protected will not play. The
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
Blu-Ray Player will automatically skip the file and
DVD-VR
begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as Xvid and RMP4 to the next chapter, or the “Fast Rewind” button to
will not play. The Blu-Ray Player will automatically return to the start of the current or previous chapter.
skip the file and begin playing the next available file. DVD/Blu-ray/BD Region Codes
• For the lack of indexes DivX files, “Resume Play,” The DVD player/Blu-ray Player and many DVD/Blu-ray
“Fast Forward” and “Fast Rewind” cannot be sup- Discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes
ported. must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code
• DivX Home Theater Profile 3.0 requires: for the DVD/Blu-ray Disc does not match the region
• Maximum resolution 720 x 480 @ 30fps or 720 x 576 code for the player, the disc will stop playing and a
@ 25fps warning will be displayed.
• Minimum resolution 16 x 16 DVD Audio Support
• Maximum frame rate for progressive source 30 When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
frames per second the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
• Maximum field rate for interlaced source 60 fields (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
per second Video title is ignored). All multi - channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
• To change the current chapter, use the remote control’s
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
or Blu-Ray Player’s “Fast Forward” button to advance
you increase the volume level to account for this change • Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing closed are playable.
the disc or to another mode.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Recorded Discs Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs each track number is unique.
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the 4
CD-ROM containing MP3, WMA or AAC (Blu-ray Disc ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Player only) files. The player will also play DVD-Video Other formats (such as HFS, or others) are not sup-
content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD- ported.
ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not sup-
ported. • Blu-ray Disc Player can extend 2,000 files and 255
folders.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
compatible format and is playable on other players. To • Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
help avoid playback problems, use the following guide- the Video_TS portion of the disc.
lines when recording discs.
• Mixed disc which contains ⬙DivX⬙ will be priority • The DVD player always uses the file extension to
played on Blu-ray Disc Player. determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording
⬙.WMA.⬙ AAC files must always end with the exten-
software publisher for more information about burning
sion ⬙aac⬙ or ⬙AAC.⬙ To prevent incorrect playback, do
playable discs.
not use these extensions for any other types of files.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the • For Blu-ray files, only version 1.0 / 1.1 / 2.2 / 2.3 and
DVD player. 2.4 ID3 tag data (such as artist name, track title, album,
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 / WMA and ACC) etc.) are supported.
The DVD/Blu-ray Player (if equipped) is capable of • Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Win- loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
dows Media Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
CD-R or CD-RW). begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Disc Errors
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
player will automatically skip the file and begin play- message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
ing the next available file. automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192 Kbps message. 4
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
between 64 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates are also visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
supported. For both formats, the recommended player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
sample rate is either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
• To change the current file, use the DVD player’s 䉱 of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
button to advance to the next file, or the 䉲 button to beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
return to the start of the current or previous file. first track.
• To change the current directory, use the remote con-

trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot Display
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera- Other Language Setup
ture is above 120° F (49° C). The Blu-ray Player may shut
down when the vehicle’s interior temperature exceeds
140° F (60° C). When this occurs, the DVD/Blu-ray Player
will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the display
until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is
necessary to protect the optics of the DVD/Blu-ray
Player.
The Blu-ray player may require additional reading time
during extremely cold weather conditions. When this
occurs, allow the vehicles interior temperature to warm,
then insert disc into player.
DVD Player Language Menu

All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting selecting the digit, push the remote control’s Right
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Eng- cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
lish. These languages are selected using a special four- selection sequence for all four digits.
digit code.
• When the entire four-digit code is entered, push the
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the language
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter code is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙. 4
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these If the digits are visible after this step, then the lan-
additional instructions: guage code is valid.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but- Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit, language codes, please contact the dealer where the
and then push the remote control ENTER/OK button. vehicle was purchased.
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select Language Code Language Code
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then push the remote control’s
Dutch 2311 French 1517
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
German 1304 Italian 1819
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but-
Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418
tons, select a digit for the current position. After
Rating And Password Setup The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
The Rating and Password settings work together to control
the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most DVD-
Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them
where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and
higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passen-
ger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password. DVD Password Entry
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, push the
follow these additional instructions: remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but-
tons, select the Rating tab. • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then push the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits, 4
remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
enter the new password.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the
value for the current digit, and then push the remote
change.
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set
the value for the current digit, and then push the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, push the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
DVD Player Level Menu buttons, select the new rating level, and then push the
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and remote control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the
follow these additional instructions: change.
Product Agreement • THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PAT-
Software ENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO
This product contains software licensed under GNU (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General AVC STANDARD (⬙AVC VIDEO⬙) AND/OR (ii) DE-
Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acqui- CODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CON-
sition, modification, and distribution of the source code SUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON- 4
of the GPL/LGPL software. You may download Source COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED
Code from the following website at no charge. FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
download/MP_632_34W821 BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG
The website provides the Source Code ⬙As Is⬙ and LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source
Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associ- • THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1
ated with downloading and using the Source Code and PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
complying with the user agreements that accompany AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO
each Source Code. Please note that we cannot respond to (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
any inquiries regarding the source code. VC-1 STANDARD (⬙VC-1 VIDEO⬙) AND/OR (ii) DE-
CODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A
CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON- your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE This product incorporates proprietary technology under
VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL license from Verance Corporation and is protected by
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG patents issued and pending as well as copyright and
LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM. trade secret protection for certain aspects of such tech-
Patents nology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation.
Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. All rights
Cinavia Notice
reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of is prohibited.
unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced
film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohib- • This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
will be displayed and playback or copying will be tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information intended for home and other limited viewing uses only
Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
• Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more infor-
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & mation on how to complete your registration.
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are trade-
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, marks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are
Symbol and DTS 2.0 Channel are trademarks of DTS, used under license.
Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark 4
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
• Blu-ray Disc, Blu-ray and the logos are trademarks of
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
the Blu-ray Disc Association.
Dolby Laboratories.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format affiliates.
created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.
This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX CAUTION!
video. Visit divx.com for more information and software Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
tools to convert your files into DivX videos. procedures other than those specified herein may
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certi- result in hazardous radiation exposure.
fied device must be registered in order to play purchased
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your
registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
EQUIPPED center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pushing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op-
eration in each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel) Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear listenable station, and pushing the bottom of the switch
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
o’clock positions.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc in good condition, take
grammed in the radio preset push-button. the following precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once 4
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the ing the disc.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no or anti-static sprays.
function in this mode. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular General Information
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in including interference that may cause undesired op-
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from eration.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does by the party responsible for compliance could void the
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
the front control operates all the rear functions.
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio. The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera-
tion. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the 4
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is
If Equipped
in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior of the rear floor outlets.
conditions.
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each
front seat occupant can independently control the Heat-
ing, Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations coming
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear
blower speed increases as you move the control to the
right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower
speeds. To allow the rear overhead control, turn blower
knob fully to the left, past The ⬙O⬙ off position into the
“REAR” control position.
3. Front Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
Manual Temperature Controls through the system in any mode you select. The blower
1. Left Front Temperature Control speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “O” (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds.
Provides left front seat occupant with independent tem-
perature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer 4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
temperature settings. Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left
for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the
rear cabin.
5. Right Front Temperature Control NOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in
Mix and Defrost, even if the A/C button is not pushed.
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
warmer temperature settings.
necessary.
6. Mix Mode
8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost 4
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
Push this button to turn on the rear window
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
7. Front Defrost Mode minutes.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
by pushing the rear window defroster switch a window cleaners on the interior surface of the
second time. window.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win- • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
9. Recirculation Control Button
CAUTION! Push this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
vehicle. An indicator light will illuminate when
the heating elements:
you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
NOTE: 10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
• If the Recirculation button is pushed when the Push and release to change the current setting.
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED The indicator illuminates when ON.
indicator will flash three times to indicate Recircula-
tion mode is not allowed. NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- 4
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
Extended use of this mode is not recommended. lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
maximum defogging, select the outside air position. 11. Floor Mode Button
• In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
button is pushed and the mode control is set to small amount through the defrost and side win-
Panel, the A/C will engage automatically. dow demist outlets.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
12. Bi-Level Mode Button Economy Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer Floor modes.
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
Max A/C
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation
13. Panel Mode Button
mode buttons at the same time.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted for
direction, and turned on or off to control airflow. The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
seat passengers.
upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear Rear Blower Control
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
center of the vehicle. or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
4
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
Rear Manual Climate Controls causing damage to the blower motor.
1 — Rear Blower 3 — Rear Mode
2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Climate Control Lock
Rear Temperature Control Bi-Level Mode
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower floor outlets.
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
front ATC panel.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Floor Mode
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are Air comes from the floor outlets.
ignored.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Rear Mode Control Equipped
Headliner Mode • Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to select individual comfort settings.
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones, 4
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
cabin, if desired.
The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all
passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air
Front ATC Panel
temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air
1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a
comfortable temperature, even under changing condi- Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning
tions. (A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
2. Blower Control Display 7. Auto Indicator
This display shows the current Blower speed selection. This indicates when the system is in Auto mode.
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display 8. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the left This display shows the temperature setting for the right
front seat occupant. front seat occupant.
4. Mode Display 9. Front Defrost Button
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, Push and release to change the current setting, the
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix). indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
5. Rear Temperature Control Display
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
This display shows the current Rear Temperature Control selected.
settings.
10. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button
6. Front Auto Indicator
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode. control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or
the lower button for cooler temperature settings.
11. Rear Control Button 14. Auto Temperature Control Button
Provides toggle operation between front control screen Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the the amount of air recirculation automatically. Push and
rear climate control screen and allow the front seat release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
occupants control over the rear climate settings. more information. Performing this function will cause
12. Rear Window Defrost the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic 4
modes.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster
15. Climate Control OFF Button
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window Push and release to turn the Climate Control OFF. If the
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically control is OFF, push any button to turn the control ON.
turns off after approximately 10 minutes.
16. Blower Control
13. Rear Lock
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed in-
Push and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC creases as you move the control to the right from the
panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls. lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
17. Mode Control Button Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Push and release to select between Modes (Panel, Bi- Automatic Operation
Level, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the 1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
ATC to switch into manual mode. words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC
18. Recirculation Control Button display, along with two temperatures for the driver
and front passenger. The system will then automati-
Push and release to change the current setting, the
cally regulate the amount of airflow.
indicator illuminates when ON.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
19. SYNC Button
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger,
Push and release to control the temperature setting for all and rear temperatures. Once the desired temperature
three zones from the driver temperature control. is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
20. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button cally maintain that comfort level.
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
trol. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
lower button for cooler temperature settings. ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: Manual Operation Override
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. This system offers a full complement of manual override
The system automatically adjusts the temperature, features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as be turned off when the system is being used in the
possible. manual mode.
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the 4
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in” presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec- mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer- and side glass.
Programmable Features” in this Section. Air Conditioning (A/C)
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by chang- temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
ing the front blower knob setting. outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE: To change the rear system settings:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can • Push ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
to prevent fogging of the windows. tions now operate rear system.
• If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not • To return to Front screen, push ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display

1. Mode Display Bi-Level Mode
This display shows the current Mode selection. Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
2. Rear Temperature Display
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
seat occupants. 4
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
3. Blower Control Display
Floor Mode
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode. Equipped
Rear Mode Control The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the
Headliner Mode right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to air through the headliner outlets.
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC
panel located on the instrument panel.
Pushing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display.
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
the front ATC panel.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle. Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear Mode
2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Temperature Lock
1. Push the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front NOTE:
ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
icon in the rear temperature knob.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs. possible.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob • The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric 4
counterclockwise to AUTO. units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
Programmable Features” in this Section.
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will Rear Blower Control
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
system to function automatically. or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
CAUTION!
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
Control System through an intake grille, located in ignored.
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats. Rear Mode Control
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place Auto Mode
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater The rear system automatically maintains the correct
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
damage to the blower motor. pants.
Rear Temperature Control Headliner Mode
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera- direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the to one side will shut off the airflow.
front ATC panel.
Bi-Level Mode NOTE: In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
floor outlets.
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level matically if this mode is selected.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Operating Tips 4
Floor Mode NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
Air comes from the floor outlets. tions.
Recirculation Control Summer Operation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid- The engine cooling system must be protected with a
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
to recirculate interior air by pushing the Recir- sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
culation control button. Recirculation mode OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
should only be used temporarily. The recircu- Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
lation LED will illuminate when this button is selected. Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Push the button a second time to turn off the Recircula-
tion mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
Winter Operation Window Fogging
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor- Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function- and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen- Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper periods, as fogging may occur.
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
Outside Air Intake
during Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging. Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Vacation/Storage
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in slush, and snow.
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
A/C Air Filter
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again. The climate control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
Operating Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .484
5
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped . . . . . . . .476 ▫ Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Extreme Cold Weather 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .494
(Below –20°F or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .481
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 ▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 ▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .502 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .502 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .503 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .526
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .504 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .529
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .509 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .509 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .551
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 5
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .538 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .539 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .540 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .546 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .556
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models . . . . . . . . .576
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
belts. mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
WARNING! in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with 5
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- mode. A child could operate power windows, other
ment and possible injury or damage. controls, or move the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the Automatic Transmission
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in before shifting into any driving gear.
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
(Continued)
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
CAUTION!
Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
ing precautions are not observed: motor will continue to run, and it will disengage auto-
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL matically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
into any forward gear when the engine is above to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
idle speed. seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
a complete stop. “Normal Starting” procedure.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot This feature allows the driver to op-
is firmly on the brake pedal. erate the ignition switch with the
push of a button, as long as the
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start) ENGINE START/STOP button is in-
stalled and the Remote Start/Keyless
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
Enter-N-Go Key Fob is in the passen-
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
ger compartment.
accelerator pedal.
Installing And Removing The ENGINE NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
START/STOP Button be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
Installing The Button position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition switch. Normal Starting
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and read- 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
able. 5
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
3. Push firmly on the center of the button to secure it into ENGINE START/STOP button once.
position.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
Removing The Button vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for Key Fob use. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
the button loose. is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
START/STOP Button (engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two Or NEUTRAL Position)
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and RUN.
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in To change the ignition switch positions without starting the
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps starting
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed 1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle change the ignition switch to the ACC position,
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK to change the ignition switch to the RUN position,
position, or it could roll.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition switch to the OFF position.
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C) engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of and vehicle.
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
If Engine Fails To Start of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer 5
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
WARNING! cies” for further information.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
START/STOP Button)
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury. If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
(Continued)
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and 2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
hold it. as soon as the starter engages.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10
once. seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal,
place the ignition in the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
Integrated Key) seconds before trying again.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the After Starting
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
dures, it may be flooded.
decrease as the engine warms up.
To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a CAUTION!
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
grounded, three-wire extension cord. ing precautions are not observed:
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU- 5
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap speed.
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
Module. is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
someone or something. Only shift into gear when ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key
the engine is idling normally and your foot is Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
firmly pressing the brake pedal. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
running. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
(key removal) position, the transmission is locked vehicle.
in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
movement. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
Key Ignition Park Interlock
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
ment and possible injury or damage. lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
number of reasons. A child or others could be LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF 5
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal position.
or the transmission gear selector. NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
in a location accessible to children), and do not feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN posi- obtain service.
tion. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/
RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehi-
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-
tions. Push the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the
ECON mode is engaged. When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds. precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
engine speeds and remain on longer.
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
• The engine idle speed will be lower. hundred miles (kilometers).
• The overall driving performance will be more conser-
vative. 5
• Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Shift Lever
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when This is especially important when the engine is cold.
shifting between these gears.
PARK (P)
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual down-
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
Operation” in this section for further information). Mov-
vehicle in this range.
ing the shift lever to the left or right (–/+) while in the
DRIVE position will select the highest available transmis- When parking on a level surface, you may shift the trans-
sion gear, and will display that gear in the instrument mission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
Gear Ranges shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
NEUTRAL into another gear range. move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution,
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade,
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
ment and possible injury or damage. vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is 5
shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK firmly pressing the brake pedal.
before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the number of reasons. A child or others could be
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key re- or the shift lever.
moval) position, the transmission is locked in • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted in a location accessible to children), and do not
movement. leave the ignition in a vehicle equipped with
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob tion. A child could operate power windows, other
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. If equipped controls, or move the vehicle.
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
CAUTION!
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion: • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
fully seated. the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from 5
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever can damage the drivetrain.
will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift
into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift DRIVE (D)
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
WARNING! shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
practices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
vehicle and have a collision. when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
CAUTION! while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for further information)
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions,
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational using a lower gear range will improve performance and
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” and heat buildup.
for further information.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
be modified depending on engine and transmission ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque aging the transmission.
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera- 5
following steps:
tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume 1. Stop the vehicle.
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 5. Restart the engine.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- position, the transmission will operate automatically,
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
recur. the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the
shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
available gear.
service is required.
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the shift lever to the right
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
(+) until the gear limit display disappears from the
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the instrument cluster.
driver to limit the highest available gear when the
transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the WARNING!
transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmis-
sion will not shift above fourth gear (except to prevent Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
engine overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
normally. grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
Transmission Gear Position

1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Display
Actual Gear(s) Allowed 1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum • The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the ture.
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
5
slowed down. • The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Overdrive Operation Torque Converter Clutch
The automatic transmission includes an electronically A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
ditions are present: cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
perature.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
WARNING!
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demon- (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
strate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive. Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Acceleration surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs be observed:
when there is a difference in the surface traction under 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
the front (driving) wheels. slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
WARNING!
4. Keep tires properly inflated. Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
sudden stop. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry 5
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
Driving through water more than a few inches/ fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- • Always check the depth of the standing water
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph before driving through it. Never drive through
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping • Determine the condition of the road or the path
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand- that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the the way before driving through the standing water.
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in through standing water. This will minimize wave
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas- effects.
sengers, and others around you. • Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami- Programmable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited information.
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can WARNING!
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not Continued operation with reduced assist could pose 5
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEER-
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If – SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
the electric steering system experiences a fault that within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
for service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
for further information. rized dealer.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
Under these conditions there will be a substantial system as the chemicals can damage your power
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and steering components. Such damage is not covered by
during parking maneuvers. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for

service.
WARNING!
Power Steering Fluid Check Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking 5
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the Parking Brake
parking brake, firmly press the parking brake pedal fully. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
To release the parking brake, press the parking brake switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the the instrument cluster will illuminate.
brake disengage.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
brake before attempting to move the vehicle. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap- ment and possible injury or damage.
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped make sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF”
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load lock the vehicle.
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
(Continued)
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- and cause damage or injury.
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. CAUTION!
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with 5
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
A child could operate power windows, other con- an authorized dealer immediately.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged BRAKE SYSTEM
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
failure and a collision.
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
(Continued)
during application, greater pedal force required to slow Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System Control (TSC).
Warning Light”.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., This function manages the distribution of the braking
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
with the power system operating. and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM front axle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake System Warning Light
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec- The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist stay on for as long as four seconds.
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM).
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
stability and control in various driving conditions.
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible. vates:
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
• Brake pedal pulsations.
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
5
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
and driven. During this self-check you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. WARNING!
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such ment that may be susceptible to interference
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, caused by improperly installed or high output
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa- radio transmitting equipment. This interference
tion(s).
(Continued)

can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa- • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
bility. Installation of such equipment should be never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
performed by qualified professionals. manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish the safety of others.
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
slow down or stop. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
(Continued) System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore is released, the BAS is deactivated.
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition WARNING!
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible. The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
Brake Assist System (BAS) nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
5
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens- turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very the safety of others.
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
Hill Start Assist (HSA) • The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will
roll down the hill as normal. remain active.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate: WARNING!
• The feature must be enabled. There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
• The vehicle must be stopped. such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
• Park brake must be off. while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
• Driver door must be closed. responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(Continued)

brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve- not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten- vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
tion is always required while driving to maintain pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
injury. pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the 5
Towing With HSA parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
while towing a trailer. • Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
WARNING! with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
(Continued)
Disabling And Enabling HSA 4. Start the engine.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
current setting, proceed as follows: turn to the left.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle bank below the climate control four times within
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
Instrument Panel” for further information. turn on and turn off two times.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
following steps: pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward). 9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Traction Control System (TCS) counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
maintain the desired path.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ- path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen- the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or 5
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the understeer condition.
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
This system enhances directional control and stability of
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
conditions. manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
WARNING! • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the natural laws of physics from acting on the the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
accidents, including those resulting from excessive ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap- maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
ESC On will turn off.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this WARNING!
mode. This mode should be used for most driving • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality 5
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
Partial Off the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which tem is reduced.
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
NOTE: The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by diagnosed and corrected.
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive speed in The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan- cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
ing. ESC also cannot prevent collisions. the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine NOTE:
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop or other vehicles.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation. WARNING!
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
customer has elected to have the Electronic tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode. that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those 5
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed user’s safety or the safety of others.
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
Tire Markings
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further informa-
tion. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE: • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
T145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have 5
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions 5
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions 5
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres- Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
sure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
spare tires. vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Loading
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you the weight referenced here.
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
And Operating” section of this manual. pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [294 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
overload them.
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
• Safety and Vehicle Stability lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Fuel Economy
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the resulting in higher fuel consumption.
right or left. Tread Wear
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement. 5
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE: Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response. Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
vehicle to drift left or right. driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month: (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated. temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION! when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which could damage the valve stem.
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires. 5
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
WARNING! meets the following criteria:
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- • The tire has not been driven on when flat.
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the (sidewall damage is not repairable).
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
75 mph (120 km/h).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
Tire Types
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
All Season Tires — If Equipped tion, contact an authorized dealer.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
between different all season tires. All season tires can be Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
WARNING!
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
the possibility of loss of vehicle control. recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
Snow Tires
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid 5
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
If you need snow tires, select tires checked before using these tire types.
equivalent in size and type to the origi- Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
may adversely affect the safety and (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
handling of your vehicle. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
CAUTION!
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
mode. Damage to the vehicle may result.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor- Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mation. Wheel — If Equipped
Spare Tires — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on WARNING!
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. only. With these spares, do not drive more than
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear 5
80D18 103M. indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
WARNING!
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
first opportunity. stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as of vehicle control.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Tire Spinning
first opportunity. When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 5
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
Tread Wear Indicators
1 — Worn Tire
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 2 — New Tire
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
WARNING!
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information. Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
Life Of Tire years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying You could lose control and have a collision resulting
factors including, but not limited to: in serious injury or death.
• Driving style. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread Replacement Tires
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven. characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
tenance schedule is highly recommended. when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
WARNING!
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
this manual for more information relating to the Load pension dimensions and performance characteris-
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict- 5
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a sion components. You could lose control and have
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
those of the original wheels. only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions capacity, other than what was originally equipped
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect index could result in tire overloading and failure.
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
• Install on front tires only.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having • Due to limited clearance, a 225/65R17 tire with a
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
failure and loss of vehicle control. traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) CAUTION!

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard following precautions:
against damage: • Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer. (Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
important that only traction devices in good condi- The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious different loads and perform different steering, driving,
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove unequal rates.
the damaged parts of the device before further use. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re- The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). 5
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. smooth, quiet ride.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
tions on the method of installation, operating maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
suggested operating speed of the device manufac- performed.
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure require-
reversed. ments found on the tire placard label located on the
driver’s-side B-Pillar.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
Tire Rotation vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if The system will automatically update and the “Tire
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
threshold for any reason, including low temperature the updated tire pressures have been received.
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor-
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn mation.
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended 5
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207
in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
to be turned off.
tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “Tire
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires
have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
placard pressure value.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
CAUTION! ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original which could damage the TPMS sensor.
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size NOTE:
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op- • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
eration or sensor damage may result when using and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, failure or condition.
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) while adjusting your tire pressure.
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after- • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
your sensor function checked. tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
(Continued)
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure the proper pressure.
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light.” • Receiver Module
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • TPMS Telltale Warning Light 5
the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
Base System Warnings
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev- will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will display
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
Module. will be activated when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
(located on the placard label on the driver’s-side B-Pillar). Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
occur with any of the following scenarios:
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order • Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once • Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
the updated tire pressures have been received. that affects radio wave signals.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 • Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor- the wheels or wheel housings.
mation.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
Vehicles With Compact Spare • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
solid.
pressure in the compact spare tire.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime 5
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as
will sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
displayed and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
Light” will turn on.
• After driving for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to receive
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
this information.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
Premium System — If Equipped TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim- The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illumi-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev- nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
Module. “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing. An ⬙Inflate
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
Tire to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents: active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
• Receiver Module display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.
• Four TPMS Sensors
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
displaying tire pressures
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
The system will automatically update, the graphic dis- If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
play of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. Light” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this infor-
any of the following scenarios:
mation.
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to 5
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash TPMS sensors.
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS- that affects radio wave signals.
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This • Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
message is then followed by a graphic display, with - - in the wheels or wheel housings.
place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Sensor(s) is not being received.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” “LOW TIRE” message will be displayed, a chime will
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault pressure value and the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message in
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” the graphic display.
message is then followed by a graphic display with
• After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
Vehicles With Compact Spare in place of the pressure value.
• The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
pressure in the compact spare tire. will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, by the party responsible for compliance could void the
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new FUEL REQUIREMENTS
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire 3.6L Engine
pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum fuel 5
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 economy and performance when using high
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline having
to receive this information. a posted octane number of 87 as specified by
General Information the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any benefit
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference. 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be genates such as ethanol.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard CAUTION!
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
ering service for the vehicle. line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
Reformulated Gasoline problems, damage critical fuel system components,
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe- illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
prove air quality. than 15% ethanol (E-15).
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited MMT In Gasoline
Warranty. Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage 5
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
ited Warranty.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• Operate in a lean mode. of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• Poor engine performance. and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and CAUTION!
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
that have these additives will help improve fuel performance:
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor- • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con- Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in engine performance and damage the emissions
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail- control system.
able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom- • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Detergent Gasoline Retailers. overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket assistance.
and diaphragm materials.
(Continued)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being WARNING!
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor- Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
mance problems resulting from the use of such monoxide poisoning:
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
manufacturer and may void or not be covered monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can 5
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control engine running for an extended period. If the
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
you. running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main- Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
with all side windows fully open.
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information WARNING!
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
refer to the other sections of this manual for information cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
Fuel Requirements NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85 non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels. rough idle following start up may be experienced even
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating if the above recommendations are followed, especially
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline. when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
When switching fuel types: • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully 5
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling. engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
least 5 miles (8 km). additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
may be used.
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu- NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
FCA Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that
Cruising Range
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
contains additional requirements, developed during ex- than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
FCA US LLC engines. liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-
mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and Ethanol compatible service components are required.
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION! 5
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Fuel Filler Cap
ADDING FUEL NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
fuel door.
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
system could result from using an improper fuel in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on, portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. could be burned. Always place gas containers on
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top the ground while filling.
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
WARNING!
is full.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
being filled.
properly tightened.
(Continued)
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may VEHICLE LOADING
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
the vehicle is refueled. istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a specified GVWR and GAWR.
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
Vehicle Certification Label 5
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten The label contains the following information:
the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is heard. This is
an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened. • Name of manufacturer
Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining • Month and year of manufacture
Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
WARNING!
• Type of Vehicle
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) important that you do not exceed the maximum front
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN. or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total Tire Size
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
GVWR. the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear Rim Size
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or listed.
rear GAWR.
Inflation Pressure The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
it is not over the GVWR.
Curb Weight
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight separately. It is important that you distribute the load
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full evenly over the front and rear axles.
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo 5
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
added. GVWR.
Overloading Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
front and rear GAWR. evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within Common Towing Definitions
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect you in understanding the following information:
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
and GAWRs. weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
TRAILER TOWING Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
and safely as possible.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, ready for operation⬙ condition.
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your Tongue Weight (TW)
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
of the trailer must be supported by the scale. hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
vehicle.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Frontal Area
5
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further maximum width of the front of a trailer.
information.
Trailer Sway Control
WARNING! The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
control of the vehicle and have a collision. any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Weight-Carrying Hitch
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized WARNING!
trailers.
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
Weight-Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever- performance, and could result in a collision.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
5
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
GCWR (Gross
Engine/ Max. GTW (Gross Max. Tongue
Combined Weight Frontal Area
Transmission Trailer Weight) Weight
Rating)
3.6L/Automatic 8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) Up to 2 persons & 360 lbs (163 kg)
Luggage 3,600 lbs
(1 632 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3 to 5 persons & 335 lbs (151 kg)
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1 519 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 968 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6 to 7 persons & 300 lbs (136 kg)
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
5
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of • The tongue weight of the trailer.
many trailer collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on put in or on your vehicle.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
CAUTION!
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for or other parts could be damaged.
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
for your vehicle. trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
Towing Requirements and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- the heavier loads.
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended. Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these • Safety chains must always be used between your
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
possible: the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
and will not shift during travel. When trailering slack for turning corners.
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on 5
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
have a collision. PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam- • GCWR must not be exceeded.
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
(Continued)
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
ratings are not exceeded:
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
1. GVWR sures before trailer usage.
2. GTW
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
3. GAWR before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti- Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
lized. proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
Towing Requirements — Tires mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
spare tire. higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
WARNING!
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
This could cause inadequate braking and possible hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
personal injury. system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is collision.
required when towing a trailer with electronically • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with 5
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
brake controller is not required. in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over collision.
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
(Continued)
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector. Four-Pin Connector
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
wiring harness. 2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the 5
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a
lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
Seven-Pin Connector vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
1 — Battery 5 — Ground performance and extend transmission life by reducing
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps provide better engine braking.
4 — Electric Brakes
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 Cooling System
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans- To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet, heating, take the following actions:
or frequent trailer towing”. Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. City Driving
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground All Models

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
5
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When recreational towing your vehicle, always
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
Recreational Towing — All Models
CAUTION!
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
this procedure: ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis-
sion in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .579 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 6
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut. . . . . . .595
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .582
▫ Spare Tire Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .585
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 ▫ Securing The Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . .608
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
lower center area of the instrument panel. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down 6
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
CAUTION! to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
service.
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
WARNING! This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
Tire Service Kit Storage
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
The Tire Service Kit is stowed behind the rear left side
(Continued) trim panel in the rear cargo area.
2. Turn the two rear left side trim panel latches to release
the trim panel.
Tire Service Kit Location

1. Open the liftgate.
Tire Service Kit
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
Tire Service Kit Components
when selecting this mode.
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
Using The Power Button
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bot-
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
tom side of the Tire Service Kit)
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
6
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
WARNING!
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded. • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
Service Kit. the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate under the following circumstances:
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, – If the tire has any sidewall damage.
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air – If the tire has any damage from driving with
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob extremely low tire pressure.
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit tire.
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 – If the wheel has any damage.
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. the wheel.
(Continued)

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
heat source. case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn- water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to immediately.
you, your passengers, and others around you. 6
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi- Hazard Warning flashers.
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
possible, if there is any contact with clothing. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
(Continued)
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as valve stem.
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
before proceeding.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
nails) from the tire.
in the OFF position.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
4. Set the parking brake.
Deflated Tire:
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Service Kit.
Sealant Mode position.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
deflated tire. Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
tire. the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 6
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit. quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
empty.
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
turning ON the Tire Service Kit. ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
use. Call for assistance.
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
pressure within 15 minutes:
hicle.”
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance. CAUTION!
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla- • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
mended inflation pressure before continuing. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Tire Service Kit components which may cause
Kit. permanent damage to the kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
(D) Drive Vehicle: (E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Mode position.
WARNING! 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 6
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to stem.
follow this warning can result in injuries that are 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others Gauge (3).
around you.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and loading information label on the driver-side door assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
opening. sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
mended inflation pressure before continuing. rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
Volt outlet.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
the vehicle.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
service center.
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
housing. Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the properly calibrated torque wrench.
bottle is locked into place. Torque Specifications
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ 6
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). Bolt Size Bolt
Socket
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the Size
vehicle.
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
Wheel Mounting Surface sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each against the wheel.
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may where it can be raised on a lift.
result in personal injury. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle 6
WARNING!
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Avoid ice or slippery areas.
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
Jack Location Spare Tire Removal
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area. under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover. means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console or under front super console
forward bin liner.
Jack And Tool Location
Spare Tire Location

To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the
spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following
center console configurations.
Super Console
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare
tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the
console.
6
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
console to gain clear access of the tire winch drive nut.
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compart- Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console
ment. Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compart- access the winch drive nut.
ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)

Drive Nut Access
Spare Tire Tools
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as-
sembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/
cover assembly.
Assembled T-handle
1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the
center console area.
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook

1 — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
Spare Tire And Cover
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in
the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the 6
winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly, Pulling Spare Tire

assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
the vehicle.
cover assembly from under the vehicle.
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the Preparations For Jacking
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
slippery areas.
release it from the wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
Removing Wheel Spacer
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-
ing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
Jacking Instructions jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a 6
WARNING! jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
help prevent personal injury or damage to your you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
vehicle: service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
vehicle.
careful of motor traffic.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” for information about the
• To assure that compact spare tires, flat or inflated, compact spare tire, its use, and operation.
are securely stowed, compact spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. 1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill
flange of the vehicle body.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
6
Jack Locations
CAUTION! Rear Jacking Locations
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated.
Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
Rear Jack Engaged Front Jack Locations

Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 inches (150 mm) from door edge.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the 6

right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you
Front Jack Engaged are sure the jack is securely engaged.
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be placed 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle. using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
the vehicle. obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel

covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
Mounting Compact Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the compact spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if
the compact spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING! WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
result in serious injury. the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare. 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow 6
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
the deflated tire in the compact spare tire location.
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon
proper wheel lug nut torque. as possible.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position. 11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to
form a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch
mechanism clicks at least three times.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for instruc-
WARNING!
tions on assembling the T-handle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
back in the stowage compartment. forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the com-
13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required. provided.
Securing The Compact Spare Tire
CAUTION!
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mecha- winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
nism stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack power tools is not recommended and can damage the
in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out winch.
from under the vehicle.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under
the vehicle.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
WARNING!
down, and place the tire into the compact spare tire/
cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
center of the wheel and compact spare tire/cover assem- have been properly extended through the center of
bly, so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the the wheel and compact spare tire/cover assembly.
compact spare tire cover on the opposite side. Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could
result in loss of the compact spare tire and cover
CAUTION! assembly, which will cause vehicle damage and may
cause loss of vehicle control and serious personal
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used 6
injury.
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the 4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
compact spare tire. right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor-
rectly against the underside of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size deflated tire, or any
other full-size tire, as the tire may not be held
securely. Vehicle damage may result.
Road Tire Installation

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting 1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install 2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
lug nuts.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
WARNING! 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, lug nuts.
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle 6
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may WARNING!
result in serious injury.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
handle counterclockwise. has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
6. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for result in serious injury.
proper wheel lug nut torque.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
CAUTION!
proper wheel lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly other booster source with a system voltage greater
seated against the wheel. than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- WARNING!
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
WARNING!
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment. • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your 6
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
Positive Battery Post
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
CAUTION!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
WARNING! or the discharged vehicle.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Connecting The Jumper Cables
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
Jump-Starting Procedure battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
WARNING! cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
result in personal injury or property damage due to negative (-) post of the booster battery.
battery explosion.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of in the reverse sequence:
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
and the fuel injection system.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
WARNING! from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri- 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
parts.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then discharged battery.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery. you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
CAUTION!
wheels or racing the engine.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not CAUTION!
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
starting.
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be- explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
damage may result. ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans- If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be 6
mission shifting occurring). moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
WARNING! 1. Turn the engine OFF.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
shift lever override access cover (located near the top hole, and push and hold the override release lever
right of the shift lever in the instrument panel). forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS

Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
Wheel lift Rear • Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
Front OK 6
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- position, not the ACC position.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
discharged, refer to ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in this section
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
for towing.
vehicles under tow must be observed.
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION!
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
Vehicle damage may occur. miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift
attach to front or rear suspension components. equipment with the front wheels raised).
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans- • Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
mission may result. 15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with improper towing is not covered under the New
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed Vehicle Limited Warranty.
equipment is not available, and the transmission is • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .623 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .624 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .624 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 7
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ Front Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . .656
▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . .668
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .669
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . .657
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
(HID) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Quad Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .667
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Air Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Battery 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
soon as possible. “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un- EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa- PROGRAMS
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
tightened. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
the problem persists, the message will appear the next
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
system is ready for testing.
MIL light off. 7
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the not proceed to the I/M station.
following:
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
not crank or start the engine. position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
to the I/M station.
start this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
happen: system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running. penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS WARNING!

Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
You can be badly injured working on or around a
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
Limited Warranty.
chanic. 7
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are services determined by the engineers who designed your
available which include detailed service information for vehicle.
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future. transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per- procedure.
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other Engine Oil
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor- Checking Oil Level
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
repair center. be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
that protect the performance and durability of your check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter- fully warmed engine is shut OFF.
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo- Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine, improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
(Continued)
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at Engine Oil Selection
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these For best performance and maximum protection under all
engines. types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
CAUTION! the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Identification Symbol
Change Engine Oil
This symbol means that the oil has
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
been certified by the American 7
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
manufacturer only recommends
tion.
API Certified engine oils.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 en-
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
gine oils.
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
CAUTION!
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is meeting MS-6395 is not available.
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or Synthetic Engine Oils
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera- You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
and vehicle fuel economy. mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended are followed.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com- oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
partment” illustration in this section. number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
tives. service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance 7
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service intervals.
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in WARNING!
your area.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
Engine Oil Filter provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
at every engine oil change.
(Continued)
Exhaust System
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
near the engine compartment before starting the system.
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
serious personal injury. or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom- exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
mended. for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain • The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
information. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
over materials that can burn. Such materials might involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. 7
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve- Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con- malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
tact anything that can burn. resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is image:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage. motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- Maintenance-Free Battery
tions, should be obtained immediately. Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In terminal posts and free of corrosion.
Emergencies” for further information. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not 7
a booster battery or any other booster source with use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other. Air Conditioner Maintenance
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
after handling. start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
CAUTION!
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
WARNING! system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
for further warranty information. ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant service be performed by authorized dealer or other
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
should be done by an experienced technician.
A/C Air Filter 4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter: 7
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and A/C Air Filter Replacement
lower the door. 5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward. the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
cover. lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
CAUTION! components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often. year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, tions of salt or road film.
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt seconds to flush out any residual water.
from a dry windshield.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. WARNING!
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- Commercially available windshield washer solvents
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
performance of blades may be present with chattering, must be exercised when filling or working around
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions the washer solution. 7
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary. After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
Adding Washer Fluid
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR All
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning Coolant Checks
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
and is not harmful to paint or trim. months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
Cooling System applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
WARNING! fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature down the face of the condenser.
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, leaks.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
pressure cap when the radiator is hot. proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti- Selection Of Coolant
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill CAUTION!
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
needed to be added to the system please contact your damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
local authorized dealer. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with 7
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
MS.90032). ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper system in an emergency, the cooling system will
maintenance intervals. need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au- you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
thorized dealer as soon as possible. ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional Please review these recommendations for using Organic
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
be compatible with the engine coolant and may that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
plug the radiator. MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with • We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an- Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
tifreeze) is not recommended. terial Standard MS.90032.
Adding Coolant • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the possible.
engine cooling system.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
NOTE: The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
level of protection against freezing according to the (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is recovery tank.
operated. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any 7
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is WARNING!
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer. • Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom- overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
(Continued)
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to spills immediately.
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the Coolant Level
system is hot or under pressure. The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
gine damage may result. (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. bottle must also be protected against freezing.
Points To Remember • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine protection of your engine which contains aluminum 7
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) possible brake damage. You would not have your full
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis- braking capacity in an emergency.
sions.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Brake System
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake when performing underhood services, or immediately if
system components should be inspected periodically. the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper failure.
maintenance intervals.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
WARNING!
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or cause leaking in the system.
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
(Continued) ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re- been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main- cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
taining Your Vehicle” for further information. fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
WARNING! cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
This could result in a collision.
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in 7
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
can severely damage your brake system and/or
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
(Continued)
reservoir.
(Continued)

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
This could result in a collision. shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
Automatic Transmission filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
Selection Of Lubricant tions.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Special Additives
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this any special additives in the transmission.
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
be used.
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
CAUTION! damage.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as CAUTION!

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
Vehicle Limited Warranty. rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
Fluid Level Check tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not 7
require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Fluid And Filter Changes
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is maintenance intervals.
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
mission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads The most common causes are:
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, • Stone and gravel impact.
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, • Insects, tree sap and tar.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under- • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
body protection.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle. car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR a month.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing open.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION! 7
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
scratch metal and painted surfaces. cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 the owner.
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, • For aluminum wheels, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well equivalent.
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider CAUTION!
mud or stone shields behind each wheel. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
match the color of your vehicle. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care tective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and equivalent is recommended.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non- Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
abrasive, non-acidic cleaner. ner:
• For chrome wheels, use MOPAR Chrome Cleaner or • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
equivalent. with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
protectants on Stain Repel products.
required to maintain the original condition.
Interior Care 7
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and WARNING!
carpeting. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Cleaning Headlights
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, age than glass headlights.
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
CAUTION! To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Damage caused by these type of products may not be remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
CAUTION!
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror. If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild 7
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning
WARNING!
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and the cleaning procedure below.
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
bing, etc.). the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders with a clean soft cloth.
Removal Installation
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and push the
at one edge to ease removal. liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
WARNING! • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro- (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as blows, contact an authorized dealer.
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the appli-
injury, fire and/or property damage. cable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A 7
is off and that all the other services are switched off label that identifies each component may be printed or
and/or disengaged. embossed on the inside of the cover.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power Mod-
ule cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
Totally Integrated Power Module a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the

following table.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

J1 40 Amp Green – Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
J3 30 Amp Pink – Rear Door Module
J4 25 Amp Clear – Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp Clear – Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control System
J7 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control System
J8 40 Amp Green – Power Memory Seat – If Equipped
J9 40 Amp Green – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle Motor/Flex Fuel – If 7
Equipped
J10 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Wash/Manifold Tuning Valve – If
Equipped
J11 30 Amp Pink – Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft Module –
If Equipped
J12 30 Amp Pink – HVAC Rear Blower, Radiator Fan Motor

J13 60 Amp Yellow – Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
J14 40 Amp Green – Rear Window Defogger
J15 40 Amp Green – Front Blower
J17 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module Trans Range
J19 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper LO/HI
J21 20 Amp Blue – Front/Rear Washer
J22 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Module
M1 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch
M2 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Fog Lamps
M3 – 20 Amp Yellow Front/Rear Axle Locker, Vacuum Pump Motor
M5 – 25 Amp Clear Inverter
M6 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor, Cigar Lighter
(Instrument Panel or with Console Rear)

M7 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) – Center
Seat or with Console Rear
M8 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat – If Equipped
M9 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
M10 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw — Video System, Satellite Radio,
DVD, Hands-Free Module, Universal Garage Door
Opener, Vanity Lamp, Streaming Video Module –
If Equipped
M11 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control System
7
M12 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/Radio
M13 – 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module, Multi-
function Control Switch – If Equipped
M14 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – If Equipped
M15 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster, Multifunc-
tion Control Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor
M16 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module/Occupant Classification Module

M17 – 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp, Running Lamps
M18 – 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
M19 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain
M20 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch Bank,
Steering Column Module, Switch Steering Wheel
M21 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
M22 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M23 – 10 Amp Red Horn
M24 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper
M25 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
M26 – 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window Switch
M27 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry Module
M28 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain, Transmission Control Module
M29 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module
M30 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Wiper Module, Power Folding Mirror

M31 – 20 Amp Yellow Back-Up Lamps
M32 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module, THATCHUM – If Equipped
M33 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
M34 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Module, Head-
lamp Wash, Compass, Rear Camera, Door Lamps,
Flashlight, Relay Diesel Cabin Heater
M35 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
M36 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel or with Console
Center) 7
M37 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop Lamp, Fuel
Pump
M38 – 25 Amp Clear Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/Unlock
Motors
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit
breaker located in the Totally Integrated Power Module.
VEHICLE STORAGE • Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery. service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
You may do the following: system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
• Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally Integrated and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
(IOD). pressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp 578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp 578
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps PC74
Liftgate Lamp(s) 578
Bulb Number
Overhead Console Reading Lamps PC579
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped 194
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamp – (Low and High Beam Halogen) H11LL 7
Headlamp (HID – If Equipped) Low Beam D1S
Fog Lamp – If Equipped H11LL
Front Side Marker W5W
Front Park/Turn Signal PY27/7W or 3757A
Rear Turn Signal Lamp 3757A
Rear Tail, Stop, and Side Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Bulb Number
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp 3157
License 168
BULB REPLACEMENT yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
WARNING!
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
accelerate the clearing process. High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
Equipped electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
CAUTION!
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This dimin- Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
seconds, as the system charges. bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
Quad Headlamps bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at 5. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb.
the rear of the headlamp housing. Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps
2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and 1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
remove the connector from the bulb. housing. 7
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the 2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing. headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
into the headlamp housing. socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
Front Side Marker Lamp 1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
remove bulb.
housing.
NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have to CAUTION!
remove the inner fender well or remove the headlamp
housing for bulb replacement. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlamp bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
housing, then pull the bulb out. bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing. 3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
Front Fog Lamp
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the 1. Raise the liftgate.
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air
dam.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two NOTE:
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or • If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
to disengage the two ball studs. scratch the paint.
• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
3. Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assem-
bly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
Tail Lamp Mounting Screws separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp 2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light and pull the bulb out to remove.
bar and above the license plate. 3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified). 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or 13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
equivalent) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Quarts (2.8 Liters) if equipped with a
rear heater.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters. 7
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex 87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
Fuel (E-85) Engine
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator.
ant is different and should not be mixed with • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine tifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use Only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure
to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or perfor-
mance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR
ATF+4 Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid
+4, MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. 7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
8
676 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
Instrument Panel” for further information.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
concern for fleet customers.
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will Severe Duty All Models
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check engine oil level.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check windshield washer fluid level.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 677
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
Required Maintenance Intervals.
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
page for the required maintenance intervals.
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. 8
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
128,000 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
boot seals, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 679
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Kilometers: 112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine). ** X

Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter if using your vehicle for any 8
X X
of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
Change automatic transmission fluid
X
and filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if nec-
X
essary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .683 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .684 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 9
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .684
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .688
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .685
682 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .689
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 683
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. 9
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 247-9753
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico Contact Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
Mexico, D. F. cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
In Mexico City: 5081-7568 center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
P.O. Box 191857
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
San Juan 00919-1857 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Tel.: (787) 782-5757 a Bell Relay Service operator. 9
Fax: (787) 782-3345 Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only We appreciate that you have made a major investment
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
have any questions about the service contract, call the sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer concerns.
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). WARNING!
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
is not responsible for any service contract other than the nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
those documents. or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR PARTS dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
operating at its best. trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
You can also obtain other information about motor
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could In Canada 9
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
manufacturer.
to the Canadian government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at: Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on 9
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
WARNING!
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
peak traction characteristics. test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
Temperature Grades WARNING!

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, The temperature grade for this tire is established for
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the heat buildup and possible tire failure.
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
INDEX
10
692 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 126, 323
Adjust Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .631
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 637
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454, 463
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635, 636
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .449, 456, 635
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Air Conditioning System, Zone Control. . . . . . . . . .449
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Alarm
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
INDEX 693
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648, 673
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641, 670 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327, 634
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .28
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 10
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .456 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 648, 649 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
694 INDEX
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Cargo Compartment
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 646 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 664 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .625
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 Child Restraints
Caps, Filler Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 118
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 553 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .114
INDEX 695
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .112 Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Connector
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . .106 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .393
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . .103 Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368, 378, 393 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .643
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640, 644
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 10
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
696 INDEX
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Disposal
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .641, 670, 671 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 656 Door Locks
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Driving
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Driving To Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . .352
Dipsticks DVD Player
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . . .400, 408, 409
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
INDEX 697
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640, 671
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .242 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 553
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .329 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .346 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 670
Emergency, In Case Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628, 670, 671
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593, 601 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629, 670
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .625 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 10
Engine Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
698 INDEX
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554, 555
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550, 554 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 553 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 632 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 664 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Filters Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Fluid Level Checks
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 637 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631, 671 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Flashers Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .671
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 342, 667 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 668
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘N Go) Seating. . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
INDEX 699
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .261, 268
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . .557, 559, 624
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550, 554 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 671 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 670 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 563
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 562
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 10
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
700 INDEX
Hazard Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Hook, Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Headlights Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 342
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .231 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Hitches Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
INDEX 701
iPod/USB/MP3 Control Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .185, 399 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Key Fob Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 225
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 126, 323
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .17 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .17 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 476 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664, 666
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 10
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
702 INDEX
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664, 666
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 668 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 342, 667, 668
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .342
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290, 559, 561
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .337 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343, 667 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
INDEX 703
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .337, 625 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 687
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 219
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628, 671
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631, 671
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 10
Mode Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
704 INDEX
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629, 670 Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630, 670 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .522
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Power
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 137 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .274
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 688 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Power Seats
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
INDEX 705
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Pretensioners Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .643 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Radio Frequency Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 30, 35, 44 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .17
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .17
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .446
Rear Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454, 463 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 10
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
706 INDEX
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64, 126
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .71
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64, 66, 68
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .71 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .78 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
INDEX 707
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187, 189 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187, 189, 194 Setting The Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368, 378, 393
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 230, 342, 667, 668
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Stow ⬘N Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532, 533, 534, 594
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Speed Control
SENTRY KEY Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 10
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
708 INDEX
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Stow ⬘N Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .84
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Steering Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .456
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .521, 522
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 526, 532, 689
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .446 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Storage Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 664 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
INDEX 709
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526, 532 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Tire Service Kit . . . . . . .580, 582, 583, 585, 586, 589, 590
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593, 601 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 523 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .575
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 526 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532, 533, 534, 594 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 10
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
710 INDEX
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 Uconnect 130
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode . . . . . . . .375
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Operating Instructions CD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . .367
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 648 Multimedia Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648, 673 Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . .376
Transmitter Battery Service Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Uconnect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .261 Umbrella Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .393
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342, 667, 668 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Uconnect Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
INDEX 711
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Water
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523, 559, 561 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 273
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Vehicle Security Alarm Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 664 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Voice Command Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234, 639
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234, 235
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Washer 10
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16Y531-126-AB
16UF-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Second
First Edition
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.

2016 Townandcountry

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Townandcountry

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Townandcountry

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 3

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 5

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 6

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 7

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 8

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Stamped VIN Location

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

CAUTION! The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Emergency Key Removal Inserting Key Into Transmitter Case Slot

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

Manual Door Lock

Power Door Locks — If Equipped

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

Driver’s Power Window Switches

Front Passenger Power Door Switches

SLIDING SIDE DOOR

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if

Liftgate Handle Location

Overhead Console Master Power Switch

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Positioning The Lap Belt

Mini-Latch Stowage Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected

Connect Mini-Latch To Buckle Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

Second Row Bench

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)

LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages

Second Row Bench

Manual Rearview Mirror

Rear Detection Zones

Rear Cross Path (RCP)

SMS Send Messages:

9. Call me later 20. Start without me Power-Up

Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s)

Voice Training SEATS 3

Power Seats — If Equipped

Driver Power Seat Switch

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Second Row Heated Seat Switch

Manual Recline Lever

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head

Automatic Folding Seatback

Tumbled Second Row Seat

Raising The Seatback Raising The Head Restraint